Printed in USA All rights reserved Copyright © 2000 by ATL Ultrasound
4730-0036-02 Rev A December 2000
HDI 3500 Service Manual
10/2/00 About This Manual
Audience
This manual supports the field service maintenance and repair of the HDI 3500 Ultrasound System. The user of this document is a qualified ultrasound electronics technician who has completed training classes on the system and its peripherals.
Manual Format
This manual is available in two versions: Portable Document Format (PDF), for viewing on a laptop-computer with Acrobat Reader, and hard copy. In the PDF version, a list of bookmarks functions as an additional table of contents, and the bookmarks, index, table of contents, and cross-references use hypertext links to provide access to the referenced information.
Conventions Used in This Manual
The following conventions are used in this manual: •
All procedures are numbered. You must complete steps in the sequence they are presented to ensure reliable results.
•
Bulleted lists indicate general information about a function or procedure. They do not imply a sequential procedure.
•
Control names are spelled and capitalized in the manual as they are on the system.
•
Menu items or titles appearing on the display are spelled and capitalized in the manual as they are on the display.
•
Scanheads and pencil or static probes are referred to as scanheads, unless the distinction is important to the meaning of the text.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Service Manual Questions or Comments Customer Assistance
Page 2
If you have questions about the service manual, or you discover an error in the manual,email/mail a Manual Change Request or contact ATL Technical Publications: •
[email protected]
•
Technical Publications, MS 264, at the address below
Various support locations around the world can provide customers with technical assistance regarding the ultrasound system. Customers should contact the sales office where they purchased the system or the nearest ATL office. ATL office addresses and telephone numbers are in the system user manual set.
Company Address
ATL Ultrasound P.O. Box 3003 Bothell, WA 98041-3003 USA www.atl.com
“ATL”, “Advanced Technology Laboratories”, “Cineloop”, “CHROMA”, “Color Power Angio”, “ENTOS”, “HDI,” “High Q”, and “Power Harmonic” are registered trademarks of ATL Ultrasound are trademarks of ATL Ultrasound. “Flash Contrast”, “High Definition”, “Power Motion”, “Tissue Specific”, and “Weblink” are trademarks of ATL Ultrasound. Non-ATL product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 1
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-1 HDI 3500 System (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-2 HDI 3500 System (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22 22 23 24 24 24 25 27 28
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical and Video Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature, Pressure, and Humidity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physio Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-1 Physio ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-2 Physio High Level ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-3 Physio Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-4 Physio Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-5 Physio Phono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Installation Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30 30 30 30 31 31 31 31 32 32 32 33 33
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 2
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Symbol Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34 34 34 34 36 37 38 39
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-1 System Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-2 Power Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-3 ACIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-4 Control Subsystem Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acquisition Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-5 Acquisition Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-6 Channel Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-7 Processing Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40 40 40 40 41 41 42 43 47 48 49 51 52 54 55 56
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 3
Display Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-8 Display Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-9 2D Black and White Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-10 PW Doppler, M-Mode and Color Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-11 CW and Static PW Doppler (TCD) Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-12 Internal/External VCR Frame Grab Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-13 External VCR Playback Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-14 External VCR Record Signal Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Power Monitor Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-15 Power Monitor Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Subsystem Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acquisition Subsystem Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Buses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57 58 59 60 61 61 62 63 64 64 66 68 68 68 71 71
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PreInstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-1System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72 72 72 72 73 73
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 4
Table 5-2 System Crate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To verify a dedicated/isolated line: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-3 Power Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Management Network Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ Perform the following steps before installing the NetLink option: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 5-4 Network Cable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ Inspect the shipping crate before unpacking the system.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uncrating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To uncrate the system from a wood crate: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-1 Wooden Crate Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-2 Unpacking Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-3 Monitor Latch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To uncrate the system from a corrugate crate:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-4 Corrugate Crate Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-5 Corrugate Crate Unpacking Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74 74 74 75 76 77 77 78 78 78 78 79 80 80 80 81 81 81 81 83 84 85 85 88 89
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 5
General Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To perform a general inspection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To perform a mechanical inspection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90 90 91 91 91
➤ To perform an electrical inspection: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 VCR Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Table 5-5 Panasonic AGMD830P NTSC/PAL 120V VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Table 5-6 VCR Programming Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Printer Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Table 5-7 Sony UP-5600MD/UP-5600MDU Color Video Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Table 5-8 Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Table 5-9 Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Memory SW Menu Control Settings Setup . 101 Table 5-10 Mitsubishi CP800 Color Video Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Table 5-11 Codonics NP-1660 Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Table 5-12 P91W(A) Printer Front Panel Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Table 5-13 P91W(A) Printer Rear Panel Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Table 5-14 Sony UP890 Video Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Table 5-15 Aspect Multi-Image Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Table 5-16 System Setups for Video Printers and Aspect MIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Final Inspection and Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 System Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 6
Image Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetLink Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Host Table, Device Table, and Device Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
113 113 113 115
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Equipment and Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Power Up and Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-1 Power-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Interface Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Defaults Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanhead Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Color Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Color Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
118 118 119 119 119 121 121 121 122 122 123 123 123 124 127 130 131 132 134
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 7
M-mode Primary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-mode Secondary Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Power Angio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simultaneous Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PW Doppler Noise Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-1 PW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steered CW Doppler Noise Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-2 Steered CW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-3 CW Doppler Gain Control Settings for Noise Band Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DiskLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-4 Image Management Printer Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NetLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-5 ECG Simulator Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiplane TEE Scanhead Face Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ISEM Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-6 ISEM Video Source Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-7 ISEM Video Calibration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 6-8 ISEM Date and Time Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OEM Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Test Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135 135 136 136 139 141 142 142 142 143 143 144 148 148 149 149 151 151 152 152 153 155 157
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 8
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Voltage Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Monitor to the Factory Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To set monitor controls to the factory default settings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting the Monitor for Optimal Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To adjust the monitor for optimal viewing: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To access FIMI monitor menus: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7-1 Monitor Control Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162 162 162 163 163 163 164 164 165 166
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optical Disk Drive Head Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To clean and adjust the trackball tension: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8-1 Cleaning the Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168 168 168 168 170 170 171
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Core Bootup Fault Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ The core bootup fault isolation procedure is as follows:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-1 Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-2 Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9-1 Normal Core Bootup and PCB LED Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9-2 PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172 172 172 172 174 175 176 179
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 9
Figure 9-3 PSM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS1, PS2, PS3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Figure 9-4 ACIM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Alert Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 ➤ To remove the alert from the display: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Figure 9-5 Alert with Second Page of Information Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 User Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Table 9-3 User Event Log Language Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Figure 9-6 User Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Formatting Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 ➤ To format a blank optical disk: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Backing Up Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 ➤ To copy Tissue Specific Presets to the optical disk:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Figure 9-7 Formatting Optical Disk/Copying Tissue Specific Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Core Dump Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 ➤ To use the core dump utilities to backup data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 User Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 ➤ To access the user diagnostics: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Figure 9-8 User Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Comprehensive Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 ➤ To invoke the Comprehensive Test:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Check Installed Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Show Bootup Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Show Machine Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Show Installed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 10
Table 9-4 Machine Options/Software Build Compatibility Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Diags Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To backup the diagnostic data to an optical disk:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Test Patterns Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 9-5 Video Test Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197 203 203 204 205 206
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Card Cage PCBs and Modules ......................................................... ➤ To remove the IIM: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To insert the IIM:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To install the monitor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To remove the monitor: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Panel PCBs, Trackball, and ON/STANDBY Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To remove the Control Panel PCBs, trackball, or ON/STANDBY switch: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-1 Control Panel Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal OEMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To install an Internal OEM: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-2 OEM Orientation on OEM Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-3 Internal OEM Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To remove the Scanhead Select Module: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ➤ To install the Scanhead Select Module: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-4 S/HSEL Installation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208 208 209 209 209 209 210 210 210 211 212 212 212 214 214 214 215 216
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 11
Figure 10-5 Monitor Cable Clamp Installation (Control Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Figure 10-6 Monitor RFI Cable Clamp Installation (Right Side Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 System Cabling and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Figure 11-1 Connector Locations, Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Figure 11-2 Connector Locations, Rear Panel (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Figure 11-3 Connector Locations, Rear Panel (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Figure 11-4 AC Input Module (ACIM) Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Figure 11-5 Centerplane Connector and Card Edge Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Figure 11-6 RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Table 11-1 RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Figure 11-7 OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Table 11-2 OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Figure 11-8 Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Table 11-3 Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Figure 11-9 Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Table 11-4 Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Figure 11-10 AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input (P/N 2275-0327-XX) . . . . 234 Table 11-5 AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input(P/N 2275-0327-XX) . . . . . . . . 235 Figure 11-11 AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Table 11-6 AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 12
Figure 11-12 AAM Video Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 237 Table 11-7 AAM Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Figure 11-13 AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Table 11-8 AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Figure 11-14 VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Table 11-9 VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Figure 11-15 VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Table 11-10 VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Figure 11-16 Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Table 11-11 Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Figure 11-17 Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 246 Table 11-12 Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Figure 11-18 B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Table 11-13 B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Figure 11-19 Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX) . . . . . . . . . 250 Table 11-14 Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Figure 11-20 Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N 3500-2644-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 252 Table 11-15 Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N 3500-2644-XX) . . . . . . . . . . 253 Figure 11-21 Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Table 11-16 Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Figure 11-22 Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Table 11-17 Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Figure 11-23 DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 13
Table 11-18 DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-24 Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11-19 Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-25 Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11-20 Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-26 Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11-21 Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-27 LED Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0393-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-28 On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11-22 On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-29 Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11-23 Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-30 Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2752-XX) . . . . . . . . . Table 11-24 Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2752-XX) . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-31 UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) . . . . . . . . . Table 11-25 UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-32 IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11-26 IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-33 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11-27 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P1-1 to P1-2 (P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 11-28 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P2-1 to P2-2 (P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
258 259 260 261 261 262 263 264 265 265 266 267 268 268 269 269 273 274 276 277 278
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 14
Table 11-29 ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly Jumper, P1-1 to P2-1 (P/N 3500-2772-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Power Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Figure 11-34 Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Table 11-30 Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Figure 11-35 Fan Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1514-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Figure 11-36 Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Table 11-31 Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Figure 11-37 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Table 11-32 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Figure 11-38 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Table 11-33 OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Monitor Internal Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 System Interconnect Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Cable Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Table 11-34 HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Table 11-35 HDI 3500 Power Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Figure 11-39 Monitor Internal Cabling Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Figure 11-40 Notes for HDI 3500 Signal/Power Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Figure 11-41 HDI 3500 System Signal Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Figure 11-42 HDI 3500 System Power Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 150.XX Software Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 15
Features Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features Not Supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150.23 (8.5.1 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150.24 (8.5.2 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151.06 (8.5.3 build level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
298 300 300 301 302
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Usage Rules for PCB Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Usage Rules for PROM Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Usage Rules for Jumper and PROM Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Table 13-1 System Software Level Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Repairing DDEA Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Table 13-2 DDEA Replaceable Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Hard Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 ➤ To replace a system hard drive: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 ➤ To order pre-loaded hard drives, a drive with the correct options and software version, your order must include the following information: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Table 13-3 Hard Drive Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Drive Jumper and Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Table 13-4 Hard Drive Jumper/LED Status1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Figure 13-1 IBM Hard Drive SCSI Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Table 13-5 Magneto-Optical Drive Switch/Jumper Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Figure 13-2 MO Drive SCSI Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 16
Replacement Code Legend (All Matrices) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 PCB Replacement Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Table 13-6 PS1,2,3 Power Supply Module (PSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Table 13-7 A1F Disk Drive ECG Audio PCB (DDEA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Table 13-8 A4F Front End Controller PCB (FEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Table 13-9 A4F FEC PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Table 13-10 A4F FEC PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Figure 13-3 FEC Jumper and PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Table 13-11 A5F Analog Interface Module PCB (AIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Table 13-12 A6F Doppler Acquisition PCB (DOPACQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Table 13-13 A7F - A11F Channel Board PCBs (CB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Table 13-14 A1B Internal Interface Module PCB (IIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Table 13-15 A2B Peripheral Interface Module PCB (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Table 13-16 A3B Pixel Conversion Module (PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Table 13-17 A3B PCM PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Table 13-18 A3B PCM PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Figure 13-4 PCM Jumper and PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Table 13-19 A4B Pixel Space Processor 2 (PSP2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Table 13-20 A5B Pixel Space Processor 1 (PSP1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Table 13-21 A5B PSP1 PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Table 13-22 A5B PSP1 PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Figure 13-5 PSP1 Jumper and PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Table 13-23 A6B System CPU (CPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 17
Table 13-24 A6B CPU PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-25 A6B CPU PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13-6 CPU PROM Locations (3500-2677-XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-26 A8B Image Memory PCB (IMEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-27 A9B Adv. Digital, Aud., Physio, &Translator(ADAPTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-28 A9B ADAPTR PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-29 A9B ADAPTR PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13-7 ADAPTR PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-30 A11B Sample Space Processor (SSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-31 A11B SSP PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-32 A11B SSP PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13-8 SSP PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-33 A12B Advanced IF Output Module (AIFOM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-34 A13B AIFOM PROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-35 A13B AIFOM PROM Checksums and CRCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13-9 AIFOM PROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-36 User Interface Module (UIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-37 PS5 AC Input Module (ACIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-38 Centerplane PCB (CTRBRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-40 Upper User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-41 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-39 Scanhead Select Module (S/HSEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-42 Upper User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
328 328 329 330 330 331 331 332 333 333 333 334 335 335 335 336 337 337 337 338 338 338 339
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 18
Table 13-43 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-44 Upper User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-45 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-46 Upper User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-47 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-48 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), Danish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-49 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), Norwegian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 13-50 Lower User Interface Assembly (Control Panel), Swedish/Finnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339 339 340 340 340 341 341 342
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 How to Find a Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 ➤ How to use the figures and tables in this section: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Parts Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Figure 14-1 HDI 3500 Main Components and Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Figure 14-2 HDI 3500 System, External Small Parts (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Figure 14-3 HDI 3500 System, External Small Parts (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Figure 14-4 Cable Drape Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Figure 14-5 HDI 3500 System, Front (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Figure 14-6 HDI 3500 System, Front (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Figure 14-7 Front Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Figure 14-8 HDI 3500 System, Rear (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Figure 14-9 HDI 3500 System, Rear (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 19
Figure 14-10 Rear Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Figure 14-11 24VDC Fans (Rear Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Figure 14-12 Caster Assembly, Swivel Type (Front and Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Figure 14-13 Card Cage, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Figure 14-14 DDEA Module Assembly (Without ECG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Figure 14-15 DDEA Module Assembly (Physio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Figure 14-16 DDEA Module Assembly (Without MO Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Figure 14-17 DDEA Module Assembly (Without ECG, MO Drive and Physio) . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Figure 14-18 MO Drive (DDEA Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Figure 14-19 Non MO Drive Connector Bracket (DDEA Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Figure 14-20 Card Cage, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Figure 14-21 AC Input Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Figure 14-22 Power Transformer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Figure 14-23 OEM Transformer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Figure 14-24 Video Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Figure 14-25 Video Monitor Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Figure 14-26 Video Monitor Bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Figure 14-27 Microphone Module Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Figure 14-28 Monitor Tilt Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Figure 14-29 Monitor Tilt Base Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Figure 14-30 VCR Support (Monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Figure 14-31 Control Panel (Lock Bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Figure 14-32 Control Panel (Upper and Lower UIF Assemblies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 20
Figure 14-33 Command Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Figure 14-34 Cart Handle (Cart Weldment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Figure 14-35 Cable Clamp Assembly (Command Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Figure 14-36 Hand Controller Connector Bracket (Command Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Figure 14-37 Integrated Stress Echo Module and Accessories (ISEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Figure 14-38 OEM Remote Tray Assembly (ISEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Figure 14-39 Tray Rod Detent (ISEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Figure 14-40 System Labels (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Figure 14-41 System Labels (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Figure 14-42 System Labels (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Figure 14-43 System Labels (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Figure 14-44 System Labels (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Table 14-1 HDI 3500 System Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Table 14-2 HDI 3500 System Accessories Parts List (Not Illustrated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Table 14-3 Peripheral Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Scanheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scanheads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15-1 Scanhead Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15-2 Scanhead Matrix ............................................. Table 15-3 Scanhead Biopsy Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15-4 Scanhead Clinical Options and TSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 15-5 PW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
418 418 418 420 422 424 432
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 21
Table 15-6 CW Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Acronyms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
4730-0036-02
1
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 22 General Information: Introduction
General Information
Introduction
The HDI 3500 system is a general-purpose, mobile, software-controlled, diagnostic ultrasound system (Figure 1-1, and Figure 1-2). Its function is to acquire, process, and display ultrasound data. The operator can measure anatomical structures and generate reports for health care professionals. The primary users are physicians and sonographers in clinics and hospital departments that provide diagnostic ultrasound services. The system has a basic set of imaging modes and measurement tools. There also are modes and measurement tools that are only available when a specific mode or analysis package is purchased and enabled for customer use. Upgrade security is controlled through the use of system-specific passwords and software.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 23 General Information: Introduction
VCR Control panels Upper user interface
Monitor
Lower user interface
Optical disk drive
Peripheral bay
Card cage and scanhead receptacles Footswitch
Figure 1-1
HDI 3500 System (Front)
Frame
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 24 General Information: Introduction
1 2 120 v~ 3 60 Hz4 1450 VA 5 6 7 ON OFF
Figure 1-2
HDI 3500 System (Rear)
Applications
Fetal, abdominal, intraoperative, pediatric, small organ, neonatal and adult cephalic, pediatric and adult cardiac, transesophageal, transrectal, transvaginal, peripheral vascular, peripheral vessel, and laparoscopic.
Scanheads
The following scanhead types are supported:
4730-0036-02
Physical Description
HDI 3500 Service Manual
•
Phased arrays
•
Linear arrays
•
Convex arrays
•
Compact linear array
•
Intraoperative
•
Static TCD probes
•
Bi-plane and multi-plane transesophageal
Page 25 General Information: Introduction
Frame The frame provides the primary structural support for the system. It has a one-piece weldment. Front and rear casters are swivel mounted. Front casters have brake locks. All casters have integral shock mounts. The frame provides the mounting base and swivel mechanism for the monitor module.
Card Cage The removable card cage slides into the frame and is secured with screws. It incorporates a centerplane with modules inserted from the front and rear. Rear mounted fans provide filtered forced-air cooling. Ten slots are dedicated with appropriate shielding for beamformer boards. External connections are provided through connectors mounted on brackets attached directly to the card cage modules to eliminate cabling to remote connectors. All PCBs and other modules in the card cage are slide-in modules with card-edge connectors, switches, and LEDs, as necessary.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 26 General Information: Introduction
Peripheral Bay Peripherals are installed into the cart with their control panels accessible to the operator. PRINT and RECORD on the system control panel control the peripherals. In addition, VCR CTRL is used to display the following VCR softkeys: PLAY, PAUSE, STOP, FF, and REWIND. The open peripheral bay will accept a variety of peripherals. Peripherals are mounted by one or more straps on a universal adapter plate. The plate can easily be modified or replaced to accommodate future peripherals. A VCR mounts on top of the monitor or in the peripheral bay.
Control Panels Control panel controls are located on the upper and lower user interface assemblies. Operator controls consist of a full-size keyboard, a trackball and an array of pushbuttons, toggle switches, slidepots, and rotary controls. Pressing certain switches displays menus on the video screen. The trackball is then used to select from the menus. Slidepots control TGC. Rotary controls are used for gain control. Included on the control module assembly are scanhead holders, storage trays at the rear, and the handle used to move the system. The keyboard wrist rest also serves as an ESD ground for the operator.
Monitor The monitor assembly includes a single 15-inch, 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz non-interlaced monitor, monitor enclosure, and mounting for the VCR. VCR and monitor are removable for mobile systems. The monitor is mounted on a swivel base that is mounted on the frame. Video resolution is 512 x 640 pixels in NTSC format and 512 x 768 pixels in PAL format.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 27 General Information: Safety Requirements
The monitor senses the input video format and will also display interlaced video with horizontal sync frequencies, nominally 15.7 KHz, with vertical sync signal frequencies between 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
Cables Internal power cables are routed from the AC Input Module (ACIM) through the right rear of the system (with the observer facing the rear of the system) to the OEM or module requiring power. Internal signal cables are routed from the Internal Interface Module (IIM) through the left rear of the system to each OEM or the monitor. No cables are connected to the Centerplane. Refer to Section 11, “Cabling”, for more information.
Safety Requirements
•
•
Classification: -
Class I equipment with Type B, BF, and CF applied parts
-
Ordinary Equipment
-
Non-AP/APG
Electromechanical safety standards met: -
CSA C22.2 No. 601.1, Canadian Standards Association, Medical Electrical Equipment
-
EN 60601-1, Second Edition, including Amendments 1 and 2, European Norm, Medical Electrical Equipment
-
EN 60601-1-2, First Edition, European Norm, Collateral Standard, Electromagnetic Compatibility
-
IEC 1157:1992, International Electrotechnical Commission, Requirements for the declaration of the acoustic output of medical diagnostic ultrasonic equipment
-
JIS T-1000 Series, Japanese Industrial Standard, Medical Electrical Equipment
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
•
System Specifications
Page 28 General Information: System Specifications
UL 2601-1, Underwriters Laboratories, Medical Electrical Equipment
Agency approvals: -
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
-
Japanese Ministry of Health and Welfare
-
ISO 9001, EN46001 Quality Assurance Standard; Certificate #FM28256 issued by the British Standards Institution (BSI) for Quality Systems
-
CE marked to the European Community Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC per Annex II, as a Class IIa device, in accordance with Annex IX (BSI Certificate #0604)
See Section 2, “Specifications”, and Section 6, “Performance Tests” for size, weight, and environmental specifications. Also see Section 15, “Scanheads” for scanhead frequency and application specifications.
4730-0036-02
2
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 30 Specifications: System Specifications
Specifications
System Specifications Physical Dimensions
Electrical and Video Parameters
•
Width: 72.0 cm (28.35 in)
•
Height: 157.5 cm (62.0 in) with VCR 142.2 cm (56.0 in) without VCR 122 cm (48.0 in) when monitor is removed for transport
•
Depth: 110.4 cm (43.45 in)
•
Weight: 172-200 kg (380-440 lbs), depending on the peripherals installed
•
Power: -
100-120 Vac, (V∼), 50 Hz, 1450 VA
-
120 Vac, (V∼), 60 Hz, 1450 VA
-
230 Vac, (V∼), 50 Hz, 1450 VA
-
230 Vac, (V∼), 60 Hz, 1450 VA
-
NTSC/PAL video formats
-
Integral AC line conditioner
-
Power consumption: 800 W; with optional OEMs, 1150 W
-
Refer to Table 5-3 for power specifications required during system installations.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Temperature, Pressure, and Humidity Limits
•
•
Physio Performance
Page 31 Specifications: System Specifications
Storage and Shipping -
High: 65° C Low: -35° C
-
All at 1060 hPa to 303 hPa (1.05 ATM to 0. 3 ATM)
-
15% to 95% relative humidity
Operating Environment -
High: 40° C Low: 16° C
-
All at 1060 hPa to 700 hPa (1.05 ATM to 0. 7 ATM)
-
15% to 95% relative humidity
-
3620 BTU/Hr at 1060 W (varies with usage, refer to Table 5-3)
Table 2-1
Physio ECG
Lower Frequency Cut-off Upper Frequency Cut-off Nominal Input Amplitude Minimum Sensitivity Table 2-2
0.3 Hz ± 0.03 Hz > 25 Hz ± 2.5 Hz 1 mVp-p 5 X 10-3 V
Physio High Level ECG
Lower Frequency Cut-off Upper Frequency Cut-off Gain Range Minimum Sensitivity
0.5 Hz ± 0.1 Hz > 27 Hz ± 2.7 Hz 21 dB ± 1 dB 5 X 10-3 V
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 2-3
Page 32 Specifications: System Specifications
Physio Pulse
Transducer Type Lower Frequency Cut-off Upper Frequency Cut-off Gain Range Minimum Sensitivity Table 2-4
Other 0.5 Hz ± 0.1 Hz
> 50 Hz
> 50 Hz
45 dB ± 1 dB
35.5 dB ± 1 dB
50 X 10- 6V
2 X 10-3 V
Physio Auxiliary
Lower Frequency Cut-off Upper Frequency Cut-off Gain Range Minimum Sensitivity Table 2-5
Fukuda Denshi 0.5 Hz ± 0.1 Hz
0.5 Hz ± 0.1 Hz > 800 Hz 28.5 dB ± 1 dB 5 X 10-3 V
Physio Phono Gain Range
Minimum Sensitivity Fukuda Denshi
Phono Filter
Low Frequency Cut-off
Upper Frequency Cut-off
Fukuda Denshi
Off
28 ± 2.8 Hz
810 ± 81 Hz
51 ± 1 dB 56 ± 1dB
50 X 10-6V 50 X 10-6 V
Low
78 ± 7.8 Hz
385 ± 38.5 Hz 51 ± 1 dB 56 ± 1dB
15 X 10-6V 15 X 10-6 V
620 ± 62 Hz
51 ± 1 dB 56 ± 1dB
15 X 10-6V 15 X 10-6 V
180 ± 18 Hz 800 ± 80 Hz
51 ± 1 dB 56 ± 1dB
10 X 10-6V 10 X 10-6 V
Medium 90 ± 9.0 Hz High
Other
Other
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 33 Specifications: System Installation Specifications
Doppler Maximum Measurable Velocities (MMV)
Refer to Table 15-5 and Table 15-6. Customers can refer to HDI 3500 Ultrasound System Scanheads and Safety Manual.
System Installation Specifications
System installation specifications include environmental requirements, uncrated and crated dimensions, and power requirements. Refer to Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 for these specifications.
4730-0036-02
3
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 34 Safety: Safety Information
Safety
Safety Information Introduction
Please read this information before using an ATL ultrasound system. It applies to the ultrasound system, scanheads, recording devices, and any optional equipment. This device is intended for use by, or by the order of, and under the supervision of a licensed physician qualified to direct the use of the device. In this manual, a WARNING describes precautions necessary to prevent injury or loss of life. In this manual, a CAUTION describes precautions necessary to protect the equipment.
Electrical Safety
This equipment has been Certified by a recognized third-party testing agency as a Class I device with Type B non-isolated and Type BF and Type CF isolated patient-applied parts. For maximum safety, observe the following warnings and cautions:
4730-0036-02
WARNINGS
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 35 Safety: Safety Information
•
Before connecting and applying power, all ACIM (power input panel) mounting screws must be in place and properly secured to complete the system ground path.
•
Shock hazards may exist if this system is not properly grounded. Protection against electrical shock is provided by grounding the chassis with a 3-wire cable and plug. The system must be plugged into a hospital-grade three-hole outlet. The grounding wire must not be removed or defeated.
•
Do not remove the protective covers on the system; hazardous voltages are present inside. Cabinet panels must be in place while the system is in use. All internal adjustments and replacements must be made by a qualified ATL Field Service Engineeer.
•
Do not operate this system in the presence of flammable gases or anesthetics. Explosion can result.
•
Always inspect the scanhead or pencil probe face, housing, and cable before use. Do not use the scanhead or pencil probe if the face is cracked, chipped, or torn, the housing is damaged, or the cable is abraded.
•
Always disconnect the system from the wall outlet prior to cleaning the system.
•
Connection of optional devices not supplied by ATL could result in electrical shock. When such optional devices are connected to your ultrasound system, ensure that the total system chassis risk current does not exceed 300 µA for 120 Vac and 500 µA for 230 Vac systems.
•
In general, only the area of the scanhead acoustic window is watertight. Except where specified in specific scanhead cleaning instructions, do not immerse the remainder of a scanhead in any liquid.
4730-0036-02
CAUTIONS
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 36 Safety: Safety Information
•
Always place the system ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY for five to ten seconds before setting the system I/O circuit breaker to OFF.
•
Always wait five to ten seconds after placing the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY before placing the switch to ON. A power-down sequence, similar to the initialization that occurs when power is first turned on, saves certain operating parameters and turns off power supplies in a sequential order. Review the power subsystem discussion in Section 4, “Theory of Operation”.
•
Always verify the power cord voltage label matches the voltage on the device before plugging in the power cord. On 230 Volt systems VCR power is 230 Volts but the monitor is 120 Volts. Applying 230 Volts to the monitor will destroy it.
•
This equipment contains components that are electrostatic sensitive. Proper static procedures, protection, and equipment must be used prior to opening and during handling of this equipment. Failure to use ESD procedures will cause damage to these components. Such damage to components is not covered by ATL warranties.
Mechanical Safety WARNING
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can amount to a significant voltage. The following precautions can reduce ESD: anti-static spray on carpets; anti-static spray on linoleum; anti-static mats; use of a ground wire connection between the system and the patient table or bed; use of the ESD pads on the system handles and the wrist support of the system keyboard.
4730-0036-02
WARNINGS
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 37 Safety: Safety Information
•
Be aware of the casters, especially when moving the system. The system can weigh 200 kg (440 pounds), depending upon configuration, and it could cause injury to you or others if it rolls over feet or into shins.
•
ATL recommends pushing the system, instead of pulling it, and to exercise special caution when going up or down ramps.
•
Position external hardcopy devices away from the system. Ensure they are secure. Do not stack them on the system.
•
During normal operation, the system power transformer (located behind the rear cover) is hot to the touch. Use care when working near the transformer to avoid being burned.
•
Excessive bending or twisting of a scanhead or pencil probe cable may cause failure or intermittent operation of the system.
•
Ensure scanhead cables are secure. Use the cable management system to ensure the scanhead cables are protected from damage.
•
Do not sterilize a scanhead using gas or heat methods. Never autoclave a scanhead or expose it to temperatures exceeding 55° C (131° F). These sterilization methods may permanently damage the scanhead. Only some scanheads can be sterilized. For information on disinfection and sterilization, see the Using Disinfectants and Gels manual, part number 4700-0249-XX.
Equipment Protection CAUTIONS
4730-0036-02
CAUTIONS
Safety Symbol Definitions
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 38 Safety: Safety Symbol Definitions
•
Inspect the system power cord and plug on a regular basis. Ensure they are not damaged in any way.
•
The power supplies continue to operate when the system is in standby. Ensure the circuit breaker is off before unplugging the system from the wall outlet.
•
For optimal performance, the ATL ultrasound system should be connected to a 15amp dedicated circuit with an isolated ground.
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) has established a set of symbols to classify electrical connections and warn of potential hazards on medical electronic equipment.
These symbols are used on the outside of the system: Non-isolated patient connection (Type B). Protection against electrical shock is provided by connection of chassis to the safety ground. Isolated patient connection (Type BF). Isolated patient connection for applied parts in direct contact with major vessels (Type CF). I and O on the circuit breaker represent ON and OFF.
/ /
On the power switch, represents ON and STANDBY.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 39 Safety: Safety Tests
This symbol identifies a safety note. Ensure you understand the function of this control before using it. Refer to the appropriate section in the Reference Manual for an explanation of the control. Drip-proof appliance (scanhead, pencil probe, or footswitch). This instrument may be safely handled in a damp environment. IPX-1
Water-proof appliance (scanheads only). This instrument may be safely immersed. IPX-7
Identifies equipotential ground (located next to ground stud on the rear panel). The following symbols are also used on the system: Identifies high-voltage components operating above 750 Vac (RMS) or 750 Vdc. Identifies the point where the system safety ground is fastened to the chassis.
Safety Tests CAUTION
Always use correct electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when any system covers have been removed. Refer to Section 3 of the General Field Service Manual, P/N 4720-0219-XX.
4730-0036-02
4
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 40 Theory of Operation: Introduction
Theory of Operation
Introduction
This section describes the electronics of the system and how the echo data flows through it. Also included are descriptions of the control architecture and the software architecture.
Operating System
The software operating system is supported by X-Windows software. X-Windows is an industry-standard software system that allows the development of graphical user interfaces, which consist of windows, graphics, and displayed text. X-Windows is made up of a server and a client. The server resides on the PCM, and the client resides on the CPU.
Partitioning
•
The server completely controls all input and output devices
•
The client communicates with the server using Ethernet, an asynchronous byte-stream protocol
•
CPU software controls all ultrasound functions
The electronics of the system can be divided into five basic functional subsystems (Figure 4-1). Each subsystem contains several modules that perform specific functions within the subsystem.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 41 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
System Block Diagram
Power
Control
All modules
SCIP Bus Acquisition
Processing RF Bus
Display
Image Bus Network and Analysis
Figure 4-1
Monitor, VCR, peripherals
System Block Diagram The HDI 3500 Subsystems consists of: •
Power Subsystem
•
Control Subsystem
•
Acquisition Subsystem
•
Processing Subsystem
•
Display Subsystem
Network
4730-0036-02
Power Subsystem
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 42 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
The Power Subsystem (Figure 4-2) includes AC Input Module (ACIM) and Power Supply Module (PSM). The power subsystem is monitored and controlled by a microprocessor in the Front End Controller PCB (FEC) using the Front End Processor (FEP) bus. System power is not field-configurable. Four versions of the ACIM provide 120 Vac/ 60 Hz, 100-120 Vac/50 Hz, 230 Vac/50 Hz, and 230 Vac/60 Hz configurations. The Power Subsystem also includes a shielded line cord, On/Off circuit breaker, an isolation transformer, a linear transformer, resonant filter capacitors, manual ON/STANDBY switch (on user interface), software-controlled power ON/STANDBY switch (controlled by CPU), and overload protection in the power supply (watchdog circuitry on FEC). There are no power supply adjustments. The subsystem converts high-voltage AC into DC voltages, then buses these DC voltages over the centerplane to the modules that require them. Status LEDs on the ACIM and PSM are covered in Section 9, “Troubleshooting”. Refer to “Output Power Monitor Theory” on page 64 for Output Power Monitor theory. The voltages supplied by the PSM are: •
+5 Vdc (Vicor module voltage for logic circuits on all PCBs in Centerplane)
•
-5.2 Vdc (Used in ASICs on CPU, DDEA, AIFOM, SSP, ADAPTR, PSP1, PDCM, PIM)
•
±6 Vdc (Used in clock and other analog circuits on all PCBs in Centerplane)
•
±15 Vdc (Used in amplifier and other analog IC circuit on beamformer boards)
•
±12 Vdc (Used for analog circuitry on all PCB for HD and MO drive voltage)
•
+12 to +24 Vdc (variable for fans)
•
±115 Vdc (0 to +HV and 0 to -HV for variable pulsers)
s in Centerplane, DDEA uses +12 V
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 43 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
FEP bus
Power Distribution Group ACIM (PS4)
AC power input
Circuit breaker
1200 VA Fuse Diode xfmr 250 V/12 A bridge 155 Vac
-5.2 Vdc
On/Standby
±12 Vdc
Environ. bus
+12 to +24 Vdc fans (via ACIM)
+HVDC FEC power failure
OEM xfmr
OEM relay (controlled by on/standby switch)
PIM AIM and AIFOM temp sensors
Power supply module PSM (PS1) (PS2) (PS3)
FEC HV DC OK (pulser enable) Sys init* HV EN 3.3V (not currently used)
OEM OEM Monitor, 115 V ± 10%
Temp Sensor
+5 Vdc ±6 Vdc ±80 Vdc (SH multiplex circuits) ±15 Vdc ±15 to -115 Vdc pulser/mux (0 to + HV)
Figure 4-2
Power Subsystem
Power Subsystem Operation The Power Subsystem operates in three modes: •
Power-Up Brief initialization period after system circuit breaker is turned on.
•
STANDBY
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 44 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
ON/STANDBY switch remains in STANDBY. Power supplies on: no power to card cage or internal OEMs, system INIT* set low. CAUTION
HVDC is present on the Centerplane in STANDBY. •
ON ON/STANDBY switch set to ON. All power rails turned on, system initialized, no faults detected, OEM voltages enabled.
Refer to paragraph “Output Power Monitor Theory” on page 64 for information about the watchdog circuits mentioned below. Power-Up Mode - occurs when the system circuit breaker is turned on. During power-on: •
PSM powers a small +5 V supply (not the Vicor output), which enables ON/STANDBY circuitry in the PSM.
•
All Power Subsystem outputs are held disabled.
•
PSM resets latches to enable the Vicor power supplies.
•
The system is placed in STANDBY mode.
STANDBY to On Mode - PSM monitors the state of the ON/STANDBY switch on the UIF. When the ON/STANDBY switch is set to ON, the following occurs: •
+5 V Vicor logic power is applied to card cage, 6 V is applied to clocks.
•
System INIT* set to high and PCBs begin to initialize.
•
OEM power is enabled.
•
All PCBs, including the FEC initialize and other PSM voltages (like 12 V for HD and MO drive), are applied as needed.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 45 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
•
FEC monitors card cage temperature via thermistor circuitry in the PSM, AIFOM, PIM, and AIM PCBs. FEC controls PSM output of + 12 V to +24 V to adjust fan velocity and card cage air flow to maintain a safe operating temperature. Fan speed is minimum up to a card cage temperature of 131° F (55° C). At minimum speed the fan voltage is minimum, or about 12 to 14 V depending on the line voltage applied.
•
FEC interprets the voltage and current of PSM and responds by updating ACIM LEDs.
•
PSM watchdog circuit sends data to FEC regarding HVDC supply voltage.
On to STANDBY Mode - PSM monitors the ON/STANDBY signal from CPU via the SCIP bus. When the ON/STANDBY switch is set to STANDBY, the system is set to STANDBY mode as follows: •
Contents of static RAM are copied to non-volatile RAM (time, temperature, status).
•
FEC requests permission to enter STANDBY mode from CPU via SCIP bus and starts a time-out and shutdown sequence to prevent software lockup.
•
CPU initiates a wait period and saves active operating parameters to non-volatile RAM. If CPU does not respond, FEC proceeds with on-standby sequence.
•
PSM watchdog circuit stops sending data to FEC. If FEC does not respond to PSM watchdog circuit, PSM shuts down HV supply.
•
HV supply disabled.
•
Power removed from internal OEMs.
•
System INIT* from PSM is set low to reset the system.
•
Card cage voltages are disabled (fans are off).
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 46 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
AC Input Module (ACIM) - PS4 •
Contains an AC input receptacle (Figure 4-3), main power breaker-switch, ground stud, power connection for OEM cables, card cage connection, and LED display. -
LEDs provide diagnostic information (see Section 9, “Troubleshooting”).
•
Provides AC power interface to transformers and OEMs.
•
Provides isolated and filtered HVDC squarewave to PSM for system power.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 47 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
OEM Linear XFMR
CAP MAIN XFMR
Reg I/O Circuit Breaker
OEM Control
PSM
+12 Vdc to +24 Vdc
Reg
HVDC +155 V
Rectifier
PS1 PS2 PS3
Relay ACIM PS4
100-120V 50Hz 120V 60Hz 230V 50Hz 230V 60Hz
Monitor VCR
Figure 4-3
Fans Printer
ACIM Module
Power Supply Module (PSM) - PS1, PS2, PS3 •
Provides -5.2 Vdc for ASICs, +5 Vdc logic power, ±6 Vdc for clocks and linear circuitry, +3.3 Vdc (not currently used), +12 Vdc to +24 Vdc fan control, ±12 Vdc for ana-
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 48 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
log circuits, +12 V for drives, ±15 Vdc for analog circuits), 0 to +HV, and 0 to -HV for pulser power.
Control Subsystem
•
FEC monitors thermistors located on PCBs around the card cage (PSM, AIM, PIM, and AIFOM). Averages temperature from thermistors and controls voltage to system fans. (Power supply is disabled in Standby. Fans are not functional.)
•
Variable ±HV powers HV pulsers and scanheads with HV multiplexers. Generates voltages from ±15 Vdc to ±115 Vdc
•
Disables all power supplies if HVDC goes below +90 Vdc.
•
HV watchdog circuit detects if the FEC fails to monitor the HV voltages/currents. Enables the user to shut down the system if the FEC fails.
•
HVDC detection circuitry on PSM reports status to the FEC, which notifies the CPU if it goes below 100 Vdc. CPU stores critical information like custom presets, measurements, calcs, and error data to NV RAM. The diagnostic error log is later updated to register a loss of HVDC. The CPU uses NV RAM information to update and protect storage devices against data corruption.
•
PSM voltage sensing circuits report the ACIM output level of HVDC to the FEC.
•
PSM diagnostics are performed by the FEC, voltage, current, and system temperature monitoring.
•
Monitors individual power supplies for over-voltage conditions and shuts down faulty power supplies.
•
Contains system “standby” circuitry.
•
Enables OEM power.
The Control Subsystem (Figure 4-4) monitors user input, gives status to the user through UIF, provides system coordination, provides data storage, and service access.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
User Interface (UIF)
Page 49 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
IIM PCM
SCSI Bus
Ethernet CPU IMEM A8B
Image Bus
Figure 4-4
Control Subsystem
SC Bus A6B
X2
RS 232 Serial
SCSI Bus
Hard Drive Optical Drive (DDEA) A1F
Network Interface and Analysis
Acquisition Subsystem
Processing Subsystem
Display Subsystem
Control Subsystem Block Diagram The Control Subsystem consists of: •
System CPU Module (CPU)
•
Image Memory Module (IMEM)
•
Disk drives (part of Disk Drive, ECG, and Audio module - DDEA)
•
System Control bus (SC bus, but often referred to as the SCIP bus) and IIC or I2C bus (for configuration ID)
•
Ethernet connectivity and control to PCM
•
Network Interface and Analysis
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
•
Page 50 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
Serial ports for printer and PC remote diagnostics (RS-232)
System CPU (CPU) - A8B (32 MB) •
Motorola 68040 microprocessor; VX Works operating system.
•
Loads modules requiring operating software at boot-up (NVRAM).
•
Transfers scanhead tables to the FEC as needed.
•
Generates coefficients and data tables for Processing Subsystem.
•
Performs analysis calculations.
•
Queries Power Subsystem for AP&I status.
•
Ethernet interface control to PCM and external Ethernet port.
•
X-bus interface to Display Subsystem (PCM).
•
Time and date.
•
Stores user setups in (NVRAM).
•
Verifies major H/W, F/W, S/W revision, upgrade compatibility.
•
Performs system diagnostics and stores results.
•
Controls a serial port for a report printer or off-line PC and a serial port used for Laptop remote diagnostics.
Image Memory (IMEM) - A6B •
32 MB RAM for data storage (standard) 64 MB RAM (optional, required for DiskLink)
•
Stores audio data from ADAPTR and frame grab video data from PCM
•
History buffers for 2D Echo, 2D Color, M-mode Echo, Color M-mode, Scrolling Doppler, Physio, frame grab video, and High Q Analysis
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
•
Page 51 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
Stores Cineloop frames.
Disk Drive, ECG, and Audio (DDEA) - A1F
Acquisition Subsystem
•
Houses an optional optical drive that formats, reads and writes 128 MB, 230 MB, or 540 MB magneto optical disks.
•
Houses a hard drive with a disk formatted to the system limit of 2.1 MB and loaded with system software and optional files unique to each customer and system.
•
Provides connection for footswitch.
•
Optional ECG and physio connectors and amplifier circuitry.
The Acquisition Subsystem (Figure 4-5) controls the transducer, generates the electrical impulse (pulser) that creates the sound wave, and converts the returning echo information into digital data. The beamformer supports 256 digitally beamformed channels. The Acquisition Subsystem consists of: •
Front End Controller Module (FEC)
•
Scanhead Select Module (S/HSEL)
•
Four Bigfoot Channel Boards (CB0 - CB3)
•
Analog Interface Module (AIM)
•
Doppler Acquisition Module (DOPACQ) (Installed only on systems with the CW option)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Footswitch ECG
Page 52 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
Footswitch ECG
DDEA A1F
DOP ACQ
(Pencil) CW S/H SEL
PCM A3B ADAPTR A9B
A6F
CW Sum Bus Echo Bus (Tx, Rx) TGC Buses
(Scanheads) Array
FEC
Array
Pulser Control
CB0 - CB3 A7F - A10F
RF Bus
AIFOM A12B
A4F
TGC Array
Figure 4-5
AIM
A5F
Acquisition Subsystem
Front End Controller (FEC) - A4F The FEC downloads operational parameters from CPU and provides real-time control of the front end for transmit, receive, and beamforming functions. •
Interfaces with CPU via SCIP bus to determine scanning sequence and mode of operation.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 53 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
•
Provides timing signals for Tx and Rx cycle.
•
Controls scanhead selection, personality, and HV Mux through the AIM and Scanhead Select module.
•
Sends scanhead operating parameters to CBs through FEC bus.
•
Receives scanning sequence instructions from CPU and generates digital TGC, PRI and other timing sequencing.
•
Bus Interfaces: SCSI, FEP, Clock, SHC, digital TGC, RF, TTag, FEC, SC, and SCAN (see paragraph “Bus Functions” on page 68).
•
Via the FEP bus, the FEC monitors pulser current via the PSM and pulser voltage via AIM. FEC compares current and voltage values to AP&I values in RAM for error reporting and to put the system into freeze mode for patient safety.
Channel Boards (CB) A7F - A10F •
Channel Board RAM is loaded with operational parameters for selected scanhead and TSI. Parameters define Tx and Rx beamforming behavior for each scan line and depth. Transfers data under FEC control for each new PRI. Channel Boards are illustrated in Figure 4-6.
•
Transmit apodization/power control under FEC control.
•
Power monitor circuitry, together with the AIM, FEC, and PSM.
•
Transmits to, and receives from transducer elements under FEC control.
•
Digitizes RF echo signals, beamforms, adds TGC, and sends digital Rx data to Processing Subsystem over the RF Bus for all modes.
•
Anti-aliasing filtering.
•
Supports 256 digital beamform channels.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
•
Page 54 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
Bus Interfaces: Summing, TGC, RF, Clocks, Timing, FEC, FEP
A7F - A10F
Summing Bus CB0 CB1
32
CB2
32
S/H SEL
128
32 Rx 32
Mux
Figure 4-6
CB3
32 Tx
Clock Bus Timing Bus TGC Bus FEC Bus SCIP Bus
32 Pulsers PSM HV
8
Digital Beamformer
RF Bus
128 Pulser Regulators
CB RAM Pulser Monitor
FEP Bus Bus Interfaces AIM
Channel Boards
Analog Interface Module (AIM) - A5F •
Generates two-stage TGC control signal
•
D/A conversion of TGC
•
Relay control for desired scanhead on S/HSEL
A I F O M
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 55 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
•
All front end and system clocks (240 MHz system oscillator)
•
Scanhead temperature sensing to FEC via FEP
•
Sends S/HSEL status and personality data to FEC via FEP bus
•
Buffers and provides HV Mux selection data to the scanhead
•
Supplies high voltage to HV Muxes on S/HSEL
Doppler Acquisition (DOPACQ) - A6F •
Tx/Rx Doppler for static CW and static PW (TCD)
•
Intermediate Frequency Rx for steered CW Doppler
•
Digitizes Doppler to AIFOM
•
Processes I/Q for static and steered CW Doppler (I/Q reference is from AIM PCB)
Scanhead Select Module (S/HSEL)
Processing Subsystem
•
Connection and mux for transducer elements and the channel boards for array transducer
•
Provides connection and interface for static CW and TCD transducers to DOPACQ
The Processing Subsystem (Figure 4-7) filters and transforms echo information into digital signal components of each modality, and stores the data as raw image video with header information for each scan line.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 56 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
RF Bus Acquisition Subsystem
Image Bus
AQ Bus
AIFOM A12B
Image Memory
ADAPTR A9B
SSP A11B
ECG
DDEA
PDBus
Audio
Microphone
IIM
Ext. Audio
Figure 4-7
IIM Speakers VCR
Processing Subsystem
Advanced Intermediate Frequency Output Module (AIFOM) - A12B •
Synthetic aperture
•
Converts RF data into quadrature (I and Q) data for beamformer data in PW and Color Doppler modes
•
Demodulates received RF digitized waveform to either amplitude- or phase-shifted data in 2D modes
•
Dynamic Range
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 57 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
Sample Space Processor (SSP) - A11B •
Processes Color Flow, Spectral Doppler, and M-mode data
•
Persistence
•
Smoothing
•
FFT
•
High Q Automatic Doppler Analysis calculations
•
Color Doppler filtering
Advanced Digital Audio, Physio, and Translator Module (ADAPTR) A9B
Display Subsystem
•
Triggers acquisition from front end based on SC bus command and local timer
•
Audio to speakers and VCR
•
Processes microphone and VCR audio; A/D conversion, gain and filtering
•
Provides D/A audio reproduction for audio sources
The Display Subsystem (Figure 4-8) formats the echo information for display (scan conversion), and transfers it to the video monitor and peripheral devices. The Display Subsystem consists of: •
Upper and Lower User Interface Modules
•
Pixel Space Processor 1 (PSP1-master) and Pixel Space Processor 2 (PSP2-slave)
•
Pixel Conversion Module (PCM)
•
Peripheral Interface Module (PIM)
•
Internal Interface Module (IIM)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 58 Theory of Operation: Partitioning
User Interface Assemblies •
Upper and lower User Interface Assemblies.
•
Controlled by PIM.
•
UIF is extended with monitor displayed controls using a windows style format.
NOTE
System diagnostics includes the UIF as part of the Display Subsystem.
Internal Monitor/
Lower UIF
Upper UIF
ISEM
Ethernet PIM CPU
PCM
UIF Control Video Sync Control
Processing Subsystem, Image Memory
A3B
UIF
Internal VCR Microphone Speakers
A1B
External Hardcopy External Monitor
PSP Image Bus
Figure 4-8
IIM
Internal Hardcopy
A4B, A5B
Display Subsystem
External VCR A2B
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 59 Theory of Operation: Data Paths
Pixel Space Processor (PSP1 & 2) - A5B, A4B •
Scan conversion
•
Zoom
•
Static and scrolling graphics
•
Freeze (buffer memory located on PSP1)
•
Master/slave relationship (PSP1/PSP2)
Pixel Conversion Module (PCM) - A3B •
Controls UIF window displays (X-windows)
•
Gray scale and color LUTs
•
Converts non-interlaced 60/50 Hz to interlaced 30/25 Hz for OEMs
•
Gray and color bar generator
Peripheral Interface Module (PIM) - A2B •
Encode/decode NTSC and PAL composite Y/C video
•
System video sync (video clock)
•
Controls Internal OEMs through IIM
•
Upper and Lower UIF control processor
Internal Interconnect Module (IIM) - A1B
Data Paths
•
Audio buffers for internal OEMs
•
Interconnections between system and UIF, monitor, and devices
Data path block diagrams show the echo signal processing path from echo reception through video display. The data paths in the illustrations are shown by thick dashed lines
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 60 Theory of Operation: Data Paths
(Figure 4-9 through Figure 4-14). Solid thin lines indicate that a connection exists but is not used for that data path.
IMAGE MEM
DDEA S/H Sel Array S/H
DOP ACQ CH BD FEC
PCM
AIFOM ADAPTR SSP
PSP
2
AIM
Figure 4-9
PIM
2D Black and White Signal Path
Audio
IIM
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 61 Theory of Operation: Data Paths
DDEA S/H Sel
DOP ACQ
PCM
AIFOM CH BD
FEC
Array S/H
IMEM
Ext. Audio
ADAPTR SSP
Figure 4-10
PIM
IIM
Audio
PW Doppler, M-Mode and Color Path
DDEA
S/H Sel
IMEM
Ext. Audio
CW (Pencil Probe)
IIM
PSP
2
AIM
PIM
DOP ACQ
AIFOM CH BD
PCM ADAPTR
FEC AIM
Figure 4-11
SSP
PSP
2 Audio
CW and Static PW Doppler (TCD) Signal Path
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 62 Theory of Operation: Data Paths
IMEM
Frame Grab Playback
Frame Grab Data
Internal VCR External VCR
Figure 4-12
A/D
IIM
PIM
Audio
Live Video
Analog
PSP
PIM D\A
PCM Live Video
ADAPTR
IIM
2
Internal/External VCR Frame Grab Signal Path
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
External VCR
Page 63 Theory of Operation: Data Paths
Live Video
PIM
IIM Audio
*
*
ADAPTR
2
These connections are located on rear of the system.
Figure 4-13
External VCR Playback Signal Path
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
PCM
PIM
Page 64 Theory of Operation: Output Power Monitor Theory
*
Video
External VCR
Image Bus *
Audio
ADAPTR
*
These connections are located on the rear of the system.
Figure 4-14
External VCR Record Signal Path
Output Power Monitor Theory
Output power monitor (Figure 4-15) provides patient safety by ensuring the system is operating within acoustical power and intensity (AP&I) limits. It also protects hardware from destructive or unsafe conditions. Power monitoring consists of AP&I software loaded into RAM; PSM current monitor circuitry; AIM voltage monitor circuitry; FEC tracking of HV current and pulser voltage; FEC reporting to the CPU; and the CPU acting on any errors.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 65 Theory of Operation: Output Power Monitor Theory
The output power monitor is designed to detect any single failure in the system, for example, a faulty power supply, a faulty beamformer component, a software failure, a defective scanhead or scanhead data file. Mode information (such as, PRI, voltage, burst, and so forth.) sent to the beamformer is also verified before allowing the beamformer to start. This prevents the system from inadvertently creating a temporary over-power condition.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 66 Theory of Operation: Output Power Monitor Theory
API Monitor Pulser Voltage*
PSM
AIM Regulator
Pulser current sense
(HV Out) ± HV
Channel Boards Waveform generator Power AMP
AIM ± HV sense Transducer
CPU SC bus FEC API software from Hard Drive
SCSI bus
* Actual Pulser voltage is determined by user selections but its source is the + 80V from the PSM.
Figure 4-15
Power Monitor Block Diagram Both software and hardware watchdogs disable the transmit function when errors are detected. Software watchdogs monitor variable parameters (for example, AP&Is vary from scanhead to scanhead). When the software watchdog in the system CPU receives an error report from a power monitor, it disables the system from transmitting. Hardware
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 67 Theory of Operation: Output Power Monitor Theory
watchdog circuits disable or shut down the system when maximum, and in some cases minimum, parameters are exceeded (for example, minimum power supply output voltage or minimum current limits). The CPU uses the AP&I software program and system control settings to calculate the required power output for the selected transducer and operating modality. These values are sent to the FEC to control generation of pulsers for the beamformer. Voltage and current monitors compare the measured pulser control values with the allowable limits listed in the AP&I software tables. NOTE
Software AP&I tables contain power maximums for each transducer in its allowed operating modes. This data is included in the system reference manual.
The power monitor also provides system and hardware protection through hardware watchdog circuitry for maximum voltage, maximum pulser currents and output electrical power. When measured parameters exceed allowable values, the power monitor circuitry disables the supply and signals the error to the system CPU. The beamformer monitors the average pulser voltage supplied to the beamformer, pulser output voltage, and average current. If the monitored values exceed the maximums for voltage and pulser currents, maximum pulser output electrical power and maximum pulser power dissipation, the beamformer software watchdog disables the beamformer and signals the system controller. Time-outs in the system software verify that the system software can communicate with the FEC and the Power Subsystem. If either subsystem is not active and functioning, the system stops the beamformer and shuts down the pulser supply. Time-outs are initiated at regular intervals and acknowledged by the affected circuits, if operating properly. Time-out alerts usually are reset if mode, power, or some other function is changed.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 68 Theory of Operation: Bus Functions
Bus Functions Control Subsystem Buses
System Control Bus (SC or SCIP bus) The System Control bus is the main communication network between the CPU and other modules. Each PCB on the bus houses a PROM called a Serial Control Interface Processor (SCIP), which is used to interface between the bus and each PCB. This bus is often referred to verbally and in documentation as the “SCIP” bus, and less often as the “Control” bus, “C” bus, or the “SC” bus. All of these names mean “the bus that the CPU uses to control the system”. •
Relieves Module Operation Processor (MOP) in servicing control bus activity
•
Master-slave multi-drop communication network
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI)
Acquisition Subsystem Buses
•
Interfaces optical and hard disk drives to CPU and FEC
•
Provides an external port for future use
FEC Bus Provides operational parameters and controls use of them by CBs
Timing Bus Carries real-time control signals to CBs, AIM, and DOPACQ •
Carefully controlled to ensure sync with front end clocks
•
Start and stop Tx/Rx cycle
•
Controls output of the front end ultrasound data on SUM and RF buses
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 69 Theory of Operation: Bus Functions
Power Supply Sync Bus Transfers real-time high-voltage power supply status between FEC and PSM to sync starting, stopping, and power level changes in the system
SUM Bus A cascaded bus that links a summing ASIC to another summing ASIC across Channel Boards. Using this bus, specially designed ASICs sum multiple echo streams from each scan line to the data stream from another ASICs data summation. It results in a higher quality echo bit stream representing the echo from each scan line.
S/H Control Bus Unidirectional bus between scanhead control sequencer on FEC (master) and AIM for SH control.
RF Bus Carries filtered digital echo data from the front end to the AIFOM for processing.
Digital TGC Bus •
Carries current digital value of TGC curves and digital values for pulser voltage regulators.
•
AIM receives digital TGC values from FEC for D-to-A conversion to analog TGC voltages applied to the CBs via the Analog TGC Bus.
•
AIM receives digital pulser values for D-to-A conversion to a high-voltage analog DC value for each channel.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 70 Theory of Operation: Bus Functions
Analog TGC Bus Two differential analog buses on S/HSEL driven by AIM and received by all CBs for two variable gain stages.
CW Sum Bus •
Differential current bus on the S/HSEL driven by CBs.
•
AIM receives and processes current representation value of beamformed CW data.
FEP Bus Extension of CPU bus on FEC bus used for nonreal-time tasks such as output power monitoring and scanhead interface control.
Time Tag Bus Used by digital signal processing modules for time tag data. FEC generates time tag signals. The FEP bus is an extension of the FEC's CPU bus. It is used for nonreal-time tasks such as output power monitoring and scanhead interface control.
SCAN Bus Used by the SH Control Sequencer in the FEC to load Mux Relay instructions into the SH Array Buffer on the AIM PCB.
Clock Bus The main system clock on the AIM PCB uses this bus to synchronize clocks on other PCBs.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 71 Theory of Operation: Bus Functions
SCSI Bus Used in the Control Subsystem and Acquisition subsystems to reduce loading time of large beamformer files. Acquisition control files are sent directly from the system hard disk to the FEC over this bus rather than over the SCIP bus .
Processing Buses
RF Bus Same as “RF Bus” on page 69 in the Acquisition Subsystem. The RF Bus is used by the AIFOM to receive data and pass I&Q information back to the beamformer and FEC.
AQ Passes AIFOM processed 2D data to the ADAPTR for translation processing. Passes Doppler, M-mode, and Color data to SSP for processing.
PD Passes processed Doppler, Color, and M-mode data from SSP to ADAPTR.
Image Passes image data from ADAPTR, stripped of audio data, to PSP1.
Display Buses
Image Same as in Processing Subsystem but also passes digitized VCR video data from PCM to IMEM and ADAPTR for audio processing.
Video Passes RGB data from PSP to PCM and between PCM and PIM.
4730-0036-02
5
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 72 Installation: Pre- Installation
Installation
PreInstallation Introduction
The purpose of the pre-installation on-site evaluation (pre-site) is to ensure a trouble-free installation and to assist the customer in providing an environment that supports the reliable performance of an ATL ultrasound system. These instructions are intended to guide you through a comprehensive inspection that ensures all physical, electrical, and environmental conditions are appropriate for optimal system operation. Refer to the system specifications in Table 5-1, Table 5-2, and Table 5-3 when evaluating the site.
Required Materials
•
Tool Kit and Digital Voltmeter (DVM)
•
ONEAC Line Viewer (order from ATL service support 1 week prior to site visit)
•
Oscilloscope
•
Three-prong Test Plug (6005-0564-01)
•
ATL General Service Manual (4720-0219-XX)
•
Power Line Data Sticker (4765-0247-XX)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Environmental Requirements Table 5-1
Page 73 Installation: Pre- Installation
Verify the system is to be operated in a room that meets the environmental requirements listed in Table 5-1. System Specifications
Parameter
Metric Value
U.S. Value
Height (without VCR)1 Width Depth
142.2 cm
56.0 in
72.0 cm 110.4 cm 200 kg
28.35 in 43.45 in 440 lbs
Ambient Operational Temperature2
295 kg 16 to 40° C
650 lbs 61 to 104° F
Internal Operational Temperature2
16 to 55° C
61 to 131° F
Internal Operational Humidity
15 to 95% RH (non-condensing) -35 to 65° C -31 to 149° F
Weight with Peripherals1 Fully Crated Shipping Weight (VCR separate)
Storage Temperature3 Storage Humidity Heat Output4
15 to 95% RH (non-condensing) 3620 BTU/Hr at 1060 W
1. Height with VCR is 157.5 cm (62.0 in); height with monitor removed is 122.0 cm (48 inches); weight without monitor or peripherals is 172 kg (380 lbs). 2. Atmospheric pressure must be between 1013 hPa to 709 hPa (1.0 to 0.7 Atm). 3. Atmospheric pressure must be between 1013 hPa to 303 hPa (1.0 to 0.3 Atm). 4. Heat output at current draw listed in Table 5-3. Peripherals will increase heat load. Discuss with the facilities engineer the possible requirement for additional air circulation to handle the heat load from the system.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 74 Installation: Pre- Installation
Table 5-2
System Crate Dimensions
Dimensions
Wood Crate
Corrugate Crate
Height Width Depth
61 in / 155 cm 39 in / 99 cm 49 in / 114 cm
61 in / 155 cm 38 in / 96.5 cm 48 in / 109 cm
Electrical Power Requirements WARNING
For safety and liability reasons, do not disassemble any power outlet or open any electrical panel. Have the facility representative confirm wiring compliance with the criteria specified below. ➤ To verify a dedicated/isolated line: 1. Explain to the facilities representative that for reliability a dedicated/isolated line meeting the power requirements listed in Table 5-3 is important. 2. Inform the facility representative of the current draw of the system and its acceptable voltage range. It is the responsibility of the facility representative to determine the proper size of the wire based upon the length of the feed. 3. Determine the location of the electrical outlet to be used by the system. 4. Verify the proper wiring of the outlet using a three-wire test plug. This plug also tests for the presence of a ground, but it cannot detect neutral/ground reversals. 5. Measure the hot/neutral, hot/ground, and neutral/ground voltages with no load. 6. Determine line loss:
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 75 Installation: Pre- Installation
a. Measure the voltage at the outlet with the load on (system connected and powered up). b. Calculate the percentage of voltage loss across the line using the formula: Percent line loss = [(A - B)/A] x 100 c. A is the voltage at the wall outlet with the system disconnected and B is the voltage at the wall outlet with the system on. 7. Use an ONEAC line viewer to measure power-line noise, following the procedures provided with the ONEAC. [Section 3, “Power”, General Service Manual (4720-0219-XX)]. Repeat with a load applied. 8. Record your power quality observations and measurements on the forms supplied with the ONEAC. 9. Affix a Power Line Data sticker to the most qualified outlet in each of the primary operating areas. Add the circuit breaker number and location. 10. Inform the facilities representative of your measurement results and advise on any corrective actions needed. Table 5-3
Power Specifications 120 Vac, 50 Hz 120 Vac, 60 Hz
230 Vac, 50 Hz 230 Vac, 60 Hz
Current Draw (normal / peak)1
90 - 110 Vac 8.0 / 10.9 A
96-132 Vac 6.7 / 8.9 A
184-253 Vac 3.4 / 4.7 A
Power Draw (normal / peak)1
800 / 1075 VA
800 / 1075 VA
800 / 1075 VA
775 / 1060 W
775 / 1060 VA
775 / 1060 W
Measurement (system only) Hot/Neutral
100 Vac, 50 Hz
4730-0036-02
Table 5-3
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 76 Installation: Pre- Installation
Power Specifications (Continued)
Measurement (system only) Power Dissipation2 (Maximum/Intermittent) Neutral-to-Ground Line Loss Distortion Common Mode Noise Normal Mode Noise
100 Vac, 50 Hz
120 Vac, 50 Hz 120 Vac, 60 Hz
230 Vac, 50 Hz 230 Vac, 60 Hz
1060/1300 W < 3 Vac RMS < 3% < 20% < 1.5 Vp-p < 10 Vp-p
1. Current draw and power draw specifications are for the rated voltage ranges. (The “normal” specification includes system operation without OEMs. The “peak” specification includes system multimodal operation with OEMs.) 2. Peripherals will increase energy demand. The “maximum” specification includes the system and OEMs during continuous operation. The “intermittent” specification includes the system and OEMs during an intermittent duty cycle, such as a print cycle lasting a minute or less.
Electrostatic Discharge
During normal system operation, the presence of electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause system lock-ups and reliability problems.
CAUTION
With system covers or shields removed, ESD will always cause component damage. ESD damage is cumulative and may not be apparent at first, as indicated by a hard failure, but can cause degraded performance. Therefore, always use proper ESD handling procedures. ESD can result from low humidity, carpeting, linen, and clothing. Avoid placing the system directly under or close to HVAC vents. While special equipment is required to measure ESD levels, you can determine the presence of ESD during the following steps:
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 77 Installation: Pre- Installation
1. Check for the presence of ESD by walking around where the system will be installed and touching grounded surfaces. 2. Ask the operators if they have experienced static discharge in the work area. 3. Suggest possible ESD minimizing devices and their usage, for example, static mats, humidifiers, and sprays. Some facts about ESD:
Electromagnetic and Radio Frequency Interference
•
ESD voltages in excess of 2,000 V cause a shock.
•
ESD is audible above 5,000 V.
•
ESD is visible above 10,000 V.
•
Voltages as low as 40 V can damage semiconductor devices.
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI) typically cause image noise. EMI and RFI can be generated by a variety of electrical devices and may not be apparent until installation. The interference can be transmitted over power lines or radiated through the air. 1. Use an AM radio tuned between stations around 1600 KHz as an EMI/RFI tester while walking around the room. 2. Note any obvious or potential noise generators. Typical generating devices include (but are not limited to) gel warmers, coffee pots, air conditioners, fans, photocopiers, computers, printers, electric typewriters, lab equipment, surgical equipment, MRI units, elevators, radios, light dimmers, and refrigerators.
Dust
Air circulation requirements of the system and the location of its air filter can cause dust to accumulate rapidly on the air filter and cause the system to overheat. Advise the customer about the need to maintain a low level of dust in the room.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 78 Installation: Pre- Installation
Refer to Section 8, “Preventive Maintenance”, for the fan filter cleaning procedure.
Lighting
Ambient light can interfere with the viewing of video monitors. A darkened room is preferred. Note if there are shades or blinds, small lamps or dimmer switches in the room, which can be used to control ambient light.
System Specifications
Wiring Requirements
Image Management Network Requirements
The ATL technician is responsible for configuring the HDI system based on the information received from the site’s network administrator. If in-wall cabling is used, it is the customer's responsibility to install the correct type of cable in accordance with all applicable network requirements and local building and fire codes. It is also the customer's responsibility to maintain the in-wall cabling for the life of the system. The most common type of cable used is 10 Base-T (unshielded twisted pair). Refer to Table 5-4 to identify what type of network cable is installed.
The electrical feed to the system shall be a dedicated/isolated line (no other equipment on the same line) with a third-wire ground. The ground wire shall be an insulated, isolated solid copper conductor bonded to the ground bus of the service panel. The outlet shall be a Hospital Grade Receptacle (for installations in North America) or an Isolated Ground Receptacle (International). Proper installation shall reflect compliance with the national electrical code.
➤ Perform the following steps before installing the NetLink option: 1. Identify the system administrator (and backup person, if possible). 2. Obtain the following information from the system administrator: -
A list of all equipment that is part of the Image Management network
-
Logical diagram of the network showing topology, subnets, and so forth.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 79 Installation: Pre- Installation
-
Diagram of the network relative to ATL systems
-
Locations of equipment communicating with the installation
-
Locations of all LAN attachment points related to the installation
-
Locations of power outlets and connector types
-
Locations of any dedicated analog phone lines for UpLink modem connection
-
All necessary Internet Protocol (IP) addresses and subnet information, including application entity titles for all network devices, subnet masks, aliases, and model IDs
3. Verify the network cabling has been properly installed: a. Determine the type of cabling installed (Table 5-4). b. If 10 Base 2 cabling has been installed, verify that it has been terminated on each end with a 50 ohm terminator. Intermittent problems and reduced performance are the usual symptoms of missing terminators, mismatched cabling, or the addition of cable without regard to configuration. Full network crashes can also occur. c. Use the network layout diagram to determine the location of all LAN attachment points. Table 5-4
Network Cable Types
Cable Type
Cable Identifier
Cable Terminator
10 Base 2
BNC connectors on wall plate Modular phone type connectors on the wall plate
50 ohm terminator on both cable ends No terminator required
10 Base T
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 80 Installation: System Installation
4. Identify OEM equipment installers and contact them regarding the installation. 5. Call ATL to check device compatibility prior to connecting new devices (printers, archive devices) to the network that are not on the approved compatibility list. 6. Proceed to “NetLink Installation” on page 114 to install NetLink.
System Installation Introduction
This section contains inspection and installation procedures. NOTE
Some parts of this section include policies, equipment requirements, and procedures that may apply only to U.S. field use. Distributors, affiliates, or other authorized service personnel should use their equivalent document.
Before the system is delivered, perform a site inspection as described in this section. After you have completed the inspection and installation of the system, verify correct operation using the performance tests in Section 6, “Performance Tests”.
Materials and Equipment
•
Three-prong Test Plug (6005-0564-01)
•
FSE Tool Kit
•
ONEAC Line Viewer (order from ATL service support one week prior to site visit)
•
Oscilloscope
•
DVM (digital volt meter)
•
Pre-installation and Installation FSRs
•
Quality Assurance Audit (PM) label (4100-0941-XX) and label overlay (4100-0941-XX)
•
Locate customer’s manuals for external peripheral devices, if any
4730-0036-02
Preliminary Inspection
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 81 Installation: System Installation
➤ Inspect the shipping crate before unpacking the system. 1. Examine the shipping crate for damage caused by rough handling. Look for evidence that the crate was opened. 2. Verify the Shockwatch and Tiltwatch indicators on the outside of the crate have not been activated. If the indicators appear red in color, check the system for further damage. 3. Report any damage or pilferage to the carrier and to the ATL traffic department.
Uncrating Instructions
Wood Crate
CAUTION
Before uncrating the system, ensure the area in front of the shipping crate ramp is clear for at least nine feet. (The ramp is the front side and is labeled “OPEN THIS END”.) ➤ To uncrate the system from a wood crate: 1. Remove the four bolts securing the top and remove the top (Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2). 2. Remove the six bolts securing the ramp (the crate front). 3. Lower the hinged ramp. 4. Remove the front and side cardboard/foam panels. 5. Remove the front caster chock. 6. Verify the upper UIF panel is securely latched (slide button is in up position) on the left side of the UIF panel. 7. Verify the monitor is correctly installed and latched:
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 82 Installation: System Installation
a. Grasp the monitor under one speaker and lift. If the latch is properly latched, the monitor will not raise. b. Repeat step ‘a’ on the opposite side of the monitor. c. If the monitor is not secured properly, remove the VCR, then remove the monitor from the system. d. Re-install the monitor ensuring the monitor mounting prongs mate into both latches. e. Repeat steps ‘a’ and ‘b’ to verify the monitor assembly is secure. Refer to Figure 5-3 for the monitor latch positions. CAUTION
It is possible for the monitor to be installed in the tilt swivel base without the locking prongs mating with the latches. In this case, the latches can still be placed in the correct latching positions, but the monitor will not be secure.
WARNING
Use care when moving the system down the ramp. Serious injury or equipment damage can result if the system becomes out of control. 8. Verify the caster brakes are released and roll the system down the ramp. 9. Knock the wood crate down flat and return to ATL.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 83 Installation: System Installation Back Panel Bolts (6 Plcs)
Back Panel Side Panel Front Chock
Top
Top Bolts (4 Plcs)
1 Pallet
Side Panel Bolts (4 Plcs)
Side Panel
Top Pad
Ramp
Ramp Bolts (6 Plcs)
Figure 5-1
Wooden Crate Details
1
All bolts are secured with a flat washer and a wing nut.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 84 Installation: System Installation
Top
(1) Remove ramp bolts. and the top bolts.
(2) Lift top off the crate and lower the ramp.
(3) Remove front chock .(4) Roll out the system.
Ramp Front chock
Figure 5-2
Unpacking Details
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Locked
Figure 5-3
Page 85 Installation: System Installation
Unlocked
Monitor Latch Positions
Corrugate Crate CAUTION
Before uncrating the system, ensure the area in front of the shipping crate ramp is clear for at least nine feet. (The ramp is the front side and is labeled “OPEN THIS END”.) ➤ To uncrate the system from a corrugate crate: 1. Inspect the tilt and shock indicators on the outside of the crate. If the indicators show red, inspect and test the system to determine if it was damaged during shipment.
WARNING
Use caution when removing the strapping bands securing the shipping container. These bands are under enough tension to cause injury if removed carelessly. 2. Remove (cut) the two plastic strapping bands from around the corrugate container (Figure 5-4).
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 86 Installation: System Installation
3. Remove the top cover from the corrugate crate. 4. Remove any accessories placed on the corrugate tray in front of the monitor (Figure 5-5). 5. Cut the taped edges of the container and remove the two-piece corrugate box from around the system. 6. Remove accessories and other loose-packed items not removed in step 4. 7. Remove the two 9/16-in bolts securing the front section of the inner crate to the pallet. This piece also serves as a ramp. 8. Position the tall end of the ramp so that it butts up against the pallet at the front of the system with the beveled end of the ramp sloping to the floor.
WARNING
Use care when moving the system down the ramp. Serious injury or equipment damage can result if the system becomes out of control. 9. Verify the upper UIF panel is securely latched (slide button is in up position) on the left side of the UIF panel. 10. Verify the monitor is correctly installed and latched: a. Grasp the monitor under one speaker and lift. If the latch is properly latched, the monitor will not raise. b. Repeat step ‘a’ on the opposite side of the monitor. c. If the monitor is not secured properly, remove the VCR, then remove the monitor from the system. d. Re-install the monitor, ensuring the monitor mounting prongs mate into both latches.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 87 Installation: System Installation
e. Repeat steps ‘a’ and ‘b’ to verify the monitor assembly is secure. Refer to Figure 5-3 for the monitor latch positions. CAUTION
It is possible for the monitor to be installed in the tilt swivel base without the locking prongs mating with the latches. In this case, the latches can still be placed in the correct latching positions, but the monitor will not be secure. 11. Carefully pull the system off of the pallet and down the ramp. 12. Properly dispose of the shipping materials. Do not return these materials to ATL.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 88 Installation: System Installation
Corrugate lid Plastic strapping
Corrugate carton (2 halves)
Bolts (2 plcs) Ramp
Figure 5-4
Corrugate Crate Details
Pallet
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Corrugate carton
Accessory tray (corrugate)
Page 89 Installation: System Installation
Monitor blocks (foam)
Side accordion braces (foam)
Handle blocks (foam)
Figure 5-5
Corrugate Crate Unpacking Details
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 90 Installation: System Installation
General Inspection WARNING
Dangerous voltages are present inside the system. Do not connect the system to AC line voltage until correct line voltage has been verified and a thorough inspection of the system has been performed. ➤ To perform a general inspection: 1. Inventory the shipment against the packing list. 2. Inspect the video monitor for damage. 3. Mount the monitor on the system (“Monitor” on page 207). 4. Connect power and signal cables to the monitor. Verify that the shorter power cord, labeled “120 Volts” and “MONITOR” is connected to the monitor.
CAUTION
The VCR power cord can be connected to the monitor by mistake. On 230 Volt systems, this will apply 230 Volts to the 120 Volt monitor, which will damage the monitor. 5. Verify the monitor swivels correctly on its base from left to right and up and down. 6. Inspect the outside surfaces of the system for damage. 7. Verify the system rolls and turns smoothly on its casters. 8. Remove the front, rear, and right side covers. 9. Verify the hardcopy device is undamaged and firmly fastened to the system. 10. Inspect the VCR and mount it securely on top of the monitor. 11. Remove any loose packing material, dust, or debris from the interior of the system.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 91 Installation: System Installation
Mechanical Inspection CAUTION
Take care not to damage cables connected to modules or peripherals. ➤ To perform a mechanical inspection: 1. Verify all modules are secure. 2. Inspect the remaining fasteners. 3. Seat and tighten modules and connectors as necessary.
Electrical Inspection
The electrical inspection may require reference to the power distribution wiring and cabling diagrams (see Section 11, “Cabling”); Section 14, “Parts”, which contains information on PCB locations and part numbers; Section 13, “Configuration”, which contains current information on module; and PROM replacement revision levels. NOTE
Perform the electrical inspection only if problems are encountered during power up or if there is evidence of shipping damage.
➤ To perform an electrical inspection: 1. Remove the rear cover from the system. 2. Verify the VCR and hardcopy device power cords are plugged into the ACIM. 3. Verify that all transformer and power connections are secure. 4. Remove the control panel lock bar. Verify the ribbon cable connections on the CIM are correct and secure. 5. Verify the connections on the VCR and video printer are secure and correct.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 92 Installation: System Installation
6. Refer to “VCR Control Settings” on page 93 and verify that the VCR is set up correctly. 7. Refer to “Printer Control Settings” on page 95 and verify that the color video printer is set up correctly. NOTE
Use the inspection procedure appropriate to the hardcopy device installed in the system.
Reassembly CAUTION
Use extreme care when reassembling the system to avoid pinching, stretching, or otherwise damaging the system signal and power distribution cables.
Setup
1. Reassemble the control panels and replace all covers. 2. Dispose of packing materials and clean up the unloading area. 3. Move the system to the installation location. 4. Verify proper wall outlet wiring and voltage levels have a three-prong test plug and a DVM.
WARNING
Do not plug the system in if a wiring fault is discovered. Advise the customer immediately and proceed only after the fault has been corrected. 5. Connect scanheads, peripheral cables, and the power cable. 6. Center the monitor Brightness and Contrast controls. 7. Verify the system fans are operating.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 93 Installation: System Installation
8. Verify proper system operation using the procedures in Section 6, “Performance Tests”.
VCR Control Settings
NOTE
To ensure proper system operation, turn on all OEMs prior to checking system functionality.
Panasonic AGMD830P VCR The VCR can be programmed using the on-screen programming menu or the VCR front panel display screen. To use the VCR's front panel screen, refer to the OEM manual or the VCR and Report Printers Field Service Manual, P/N 4720-0223-XX. NOTE
If the VCR was previously installed on another system, check the Serial Interface dip switch settings.
1. For systems with software versions at or above 038.15, press Setups and select Peripherals, Internal VCR, and Panasonic MD830. Select Close at the bottom of the display. 2. Set the MENU switch on the VCR to SET. Set the MODE LOCK switch to OFF. 3. Press Superkey and Video simultaneously to toggle through the on-screen menus (such as, internal VCR, internal color printer, and so forth). The VCR menu lists on-screen menu items, which are on Table 5-5. 4. Verify the VCR parameter settings. Refer to Table 5-6 for VCR front panel control functions while in programming mode. 5. Press Setups and change the VCR configuration to SVHS to return to normal configuration. 6. Set the VCR Menu switch to OFF
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 94 Installation: System Installation
. Table 5-5 Parameter
Panasonic AGMD830P NTSC/PAL 120 V VCR Setup Setting
Tilt Down Panel MODE LOCK MENU
OFF SET
On Screen Menu VISS Tape Select Auto Back Tape In Mode Tape End Mode REC Tape End STBY Off Time Bit Length Stop Bit Parity Baud Rate Hour Meter HI-FI REC Audio Dub
Off T-120 (NTSC) or E-810 (PAL) On Stop Stop Stop 5 Min. 8 Bit Stop-1 None 9600 XXXX Hr On CH1
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-5
Panasonic AGMD830P NTSC/PAL 120 V VCR Setup (Continued)
Parameter
Setting
Edit (NTSC only) YC Filter (NTSC only)
Off Off
Table 5-6
Printer Control Settings
Page 95 Installation: System Installation
VCR Programming Controls
VCR Control
Programming Operation
Stop Rewind Play Record Fast Forward Inside Search Dial
Moves the selection item cursor forward Moves the selection item cursor backward Returns to the previous menu page Advances to the next menu page Moves the menu selection to the item below Moves the menu selection to the item above or below
For printers that use on-screen programming, use the following procedure to setup the printer menus. 1. Press Menu on the printer front panel. 2. Press Superkey and Video simultaneously to toggle through the on-screen menus. 3. Set the printer control settings as specified in the printer setup tables below (Table 5-7 through Table 5-16). 4. Set the Menu switch to OFF.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-7 Parameter
Page 96 Installation: System Installation
Sony UP-5600MD/UP-5600MDU Color Video Printer Setup Setting
Color Adjustment Setup Menu Preset Red C-R Green M-G Blue Y-B Dark Light Save
1 +5 +5 +5 -5 +5 1, EXEC
Analog Setup Menu Hue (NTSC only)
Default
Color Gain AGC Moni C-R Moni M-G Moni Y-B
Default Default OFF Default Default Default
System Setup Menu Display
ON
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-7
Page 97 Installation: System Installation
Sony UP-5600MD/UP-5600MDU Color Video Printer Setup (Continued)
Parameter
Setting
Beep LCD LCD-CNTR Baud Rate Monitor User Set
ON ON Center Default EE 1
Print Setup H-Shift V-Shift H-Size V-Size
-24 Dots (NTSC) -16 Dots (PAL) -8 Lines (NTSC) -10 Lines (PAL) 952 Dots (NTSC) 924 Dots (PAL) 480 Lines (NTSC) 576 Lines (PAL)
Setups Separate Dup-Image Sharpness
ON OFF +4
System Function Menu Remote2
C&Print
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-7
Page 98 Installation: System Installation
Sony UP-5600MD/UP-5600MDU Color Video Printer Setup (Continued)
Parameter
Setting
Remote3A
Print (Does not matter. Used only with Sony footswitch.) Back-Sp (Does not matter. Used only with Sony footswitch.) CAP/SRC (Does not matter. Used only with Sony footswitch.) Part Single OFF
Remote3B Remote3C Clear Capture Timer
Control Panel Button Setups Motion Correct Input Select Multi-Picture Print QTY Display P in P Caption ON/OFF
OFF RGB 1 1 OFF OFF
Rear Panel Switches R/G/B/Sync 75 Ohm
ON
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-7
Page 99 Installation: System Installation
Sony UP-5600MD/UP-5600MDU Color Video Printer Setup (Continued)
Parameter
Setting
S-Video 75 Ohm NTSC/PAL
OFF Set to appropriate video format (UP5600MD has NTSC/PAL switch; UP5600MDU is NTSC only.)
Table 5-8 Parameter
Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Setup Setting
Color Adj BRT CONT R-Sub B-Sub Center
0 -8 0 0 OFF
Analog Adj BRT CONT R-Sub B-Sub Center
0 0 0 0 OFF
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-8 Parameter
Page 100 Installation: System Installation
Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Setup (Continued) Setting
Signal Set Input Field AFC
RGB NML OFF
Additional Strobe Multi: 1 for 1 Mode Images Separate
OFF OFF DIFF 2 ON
Print Mode
L (large)
Grad APT Comment Mirror
ECHO H1 OFF OFF
System Size H-Posi Copy
USER 0 OFF
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-8
Page 101 Installation: System Installation
Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Setup (Continued)
Parameter
Setting
Top Bottom Left Right Page Inc Live Sel Convert Buzzer
-8 10 -16 6 ON DIGITAL ON ON
Rear Panel Switch Settings IMPEDANCE - RGB IMPEDANCE - SYNC
75 Ω HIGH
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-9 Parameter
Page 102 Installation: System Installation
Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Memory SW Menu Control Settings Setup Setting
Time Month Date Year Hour Minute Second
Not used with ultrasound systems.
Key Set KEY LOCK MEM&PRN MEM&STOP MEM&MON PRINT&CLR CLEAR KEY
OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ONE
Signal Set IN Sync OUT Sync Sync RGB SOG OUT H Start
0.3 V 0.3 V NEGA OFF NML
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-9
Page 103 Installation: System Installation
Mitsubishi CP700 Color Video Printer Memory SW Menu Control Settings Setup (Continued)
Parameter
Setting
Spcl Timing MON R-Sub MON B-Sub Print Set PRN DIR PRN Speed Margin Cut V Position Echo Gamma Adj.
OFF 0 0 NML NML OFF 34 a: (64, 0) b: (128, 0) c: (192, 0)
System Setting PRG All Init Baud Rate Remote Busy
OFF 9600 H
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-10 Parameter
Page 104 Installation: System Installation
Mitsubishi CP800 Color Video Printer Setup Setting
COLOR ADJ BRT CONT R-Sub G-Sub B-Sub Center
-8 -4 0 0 0 [>]
ANALOG ADJ Color Tint BRT CONT R-Sub B-Sub Center INPUT Input
N/A N/A 0 0 0 0 [>] RGB
ADDITIONAL Multi
OFF
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-10
Page 105 Installation: System Installation
Mitsubishi CP800 Color Video Printer Setup
Parameter
Setting
Buzzer
TONE 1
PRINT Mode
AUTO
Grad
ECHO
GAMMA ADJ Color Hi Mid Low Low Point Mid Point Hi Point Apt Com Mirror Comment
ALL 0 0 0 64 128 192 N OFF OFF [>]
SIZE/TIMING H-Posi H-Start Size Signal Set 1
0 NOR WIDE
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-10
Page 106 Installation: System Installation
Mitsubishi CP800 Color Video Printer Setup
Parameter
Setting
Field AFC
NML OFF
Sync R-SUB B-SUB
EXT 0 0
Signal Set 2 IN SYNC OUT SYNC SYNC RGB SOG OUT SPCL TIMING
TTL SOG TTL NEGA OFF OFF
Print Set DIR MARGIN CUT AUTO CUT OP MODE
NORMAL OFF ON 4P
System Set Page Inc Live Sel Convert
ON DIGITAL ON
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-10
Page 107 Installation: System Installation
Mitsubishi CP800 Color Video Printer Setup
Parameter
Setting
Remaining
OFF
Remote Set BAUD RATE COMMAND TYPE RESPONSE BUSY LEVEL BUSY MODE V SYNC MEM
9600 A RETURN H NOT PRINT OFF
Previous Error MECHA ERROR PRG ALL INIT
NOTHING OFF
Table 5-11
Codonics NP-1660 Printer Setup Settings
Parameter TCR Gamma1 Contrast1 Anti-alias
CVPAPER
CVTRANS
DVPAPER
DVFILM
0 1.25
0 1.00
1.00
1.25
10
5
0
5
Better
Better
Better
Better
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-11
Page 108 Installation: System Installation
Codonics NP-1660 Printer Setup (Continued) Settings
Parameter Rotate Scale MCM DMAX1
CVPAPER
CVTRANS
Auto
Auto
Sharp1 170 -
Sharp1 170 -
DVPAPER
DVFILM
Auto Bilinear
Auto Sharp1 7
-
1. Adjustable in the field. None of the other default settings are recommended for field adjustment.
Table 5-12
P91W(A) Printer Front Panel Control Settings
Switch BRIGHT
Function Adjusts print brightness
-3
CONTRAST
Adjusts print contrast
-2
GAMMA
Adjusts the gamma curve
5
PRT SIZE
Changes the print size
Normal
Table 5-13 Switch 1 2
Setting
P91W(A) Printer Rear Panel Switch Settings Function1 Impedance
Setting OFF (HIGH)
Trap
ON
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-13 Switch
Page 109 Installation: System Installation
P91W(A) Printer Rear Panel Switch Settings (Continued) Function1
Setting
3
Gain
OFF
4
Image
OFF (POSI)
5
AFC
OFF
6
DIR
OFF (NOR)
7
Memory
OFF (FRAMA)
8
Scan
OFF (UNDER)
9
Saving2
OFF
10
Paper
OFF (HD)
HPOSI
-
DO NOT ADJUST
AFC
-
DO NOT ADJUST
1. Refer to the P91W(A) Operation Manual (P/N 4740-0287-01) f or a complete description of switch functions. 2. Switch 9 is for paper-saving mode. Install printers with the paper-saving mode turned off. If the paper-saving mode is turned on, instruct the customer to advance the paper before removing the print; otherwise, the patient data will be cut off the top of the print.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-14 Parameter Front Panel Print Size Contrast Brightness Thru/EE Switch STD/SIDE Rear Panel Dip Switches GAMMA Paper Type
Table 5-15
Page 110 Installation: System Installation
Sony UP890 Video Printer Setting Normal 10:00 11:30 EE STD All ON II IV
Aspect Multi-Image Camera
Parameter
Setting
Brightness Contrast Polarity
35 45 +
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 5-16
Final Inspection and Documentation
Page 111 Installation: System Installation
System Setups for Video Printers and Aspect MIC
Parameter
Setting
Use Print Button To Environment Print Color Images to B&W Printer Store to Optical Disk During Exam
Print Local (Internal) Print All Yes OFF
1. Perform a Pre-Installation Inspection if one was not previously completed. Record all pertinent information on the Pre-Installation and Installation FSRs. 2. Verify electrical power quality using the system and its peripherals as the final load. Also compare your pre-install observations of ambient temperature, RFI, and ESD conditions to present conditions. Record all measurements and observations on the Installation FSR. 3. Insert Manual Changes and Operating Notes into the system Reference Manual. Have the Operating Instructions and the Reference Manual available for review with the system operator so that questions can be answered during the system presentation. 4. Complete a Quality Assurance Audit (PM) sticker and attach it to left side of the monitor. 5. Tell the facilities representative the system is installed and ready for any safety tests they normally conduct.
4730-0036-02
System Presentation
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 112 Installation: System Installation
When the system and the customer documents are ready, present them to the operators using the following in-service procedure. 1. Review the Customer Order Acknowledgement (COA) with the customers to familiarize them with the system and its options and to assure them that they have received what they ordered. 2. Present and overview the System Manuals CD or printed operator manuals. Describe these publications and emphasize that all information needed to operate the system and peripherals is in them. 3. Show the operators how to turn on the system and any external OEMs. Explain the differences between the main circuit breaker and the On/Standby switch. 4. Describe the initialization process and explain the system programs in this process. 5. Explain the reasons for the following cautions:
CAUTIONS
•
Always place the system ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY for five to ten seconds before setting the system I/O circuit breaker to OFF.
•
Always wait five to ten seconds after placing the system ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY before placing the switch back to ON. A power-down sequence, similar to the initialization that occurs when power is first turned on, saves certain operating parameters and then turns off power supplies in a sequential order.
•
This equipment contains components that are electrostatic sensitive. Proper static procedures, protection, and equipment must be used prior to opening and during handling of this equipment. Failure to use ESD procedures will cause damage to these components. Such damage to components is not covered by ATL warranties.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 113 Installation: System Installation
6. Explain why it is important for them to never remove covers from the system because of ESD and warranty considerations. 7. Once the system is fully initialized, give the operators a brief demonstration of system controls. Limit the discussion of the MENU buttons to the concept that pull-down menu boxes contain higher level commands for the functions selected by the mode buttons. Review the following: -
How to set Time and Hospital Name
-
How to enter patient data
-
Monitor Brightness/Contrast controls and default settings
-
Mode buttons
-
Rotary controls
-
Up/down spring-loaded control switches
-
TGC slide controls
-
Trackball and SELECT button; include their use with pull-down menus
-
Volume control
-
VCR and hardcopy device operation
-
Signal ports, including scanheads
8. Describe and demonstrate the following system maintenance procedures, to be performed as needed: -
Fan filter cleaning
-
System cleaning
-
Scanhead disinfection
-
B/W printer head cleaning
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
-
Image Optimization
Page 114 Installation: NetLink Installation
Other peripherals, as necessary
Set the system to the following settings for optimum image quality: •
Follow the “Monitor Adjustments” on page 162 to set the background, brightness, and contrast.
•
Center the TGC slidepots in a straight line. Then, adjust as necessary for patient habitus. Set slidepots before setting a new TSI.
•
Compression curve to C2. Lowering compression decreases image noise.
•
Gray Maps and Color Maps as required by customer. (Dedicated gray maps exist for General Imaging and Cardiac Imaging.)
•
GAIN and OUTPUT as required. (Reduce to decrease artifacts.) -
Completing the Installation
1. Discuss the present status of the system with your customer and review the hardcopy prints that were taken during the system check out. Be sure to cover any environmental concerns as well, making suggestions as appropriate. 2. Ask your customer if there are any questions they may have about the new system or ATL. Document their issues on the Installation FSR and make a commitment to follow-up on them. 3. Review the customer procedures to place a service call or to call for technical assistance. 4. Complete the Installation FSR.
NetLink Installation
NetLink is installed using a site disk created from the host table, device table, and device files, which are part of the Image Management system setups. The following steps summarize the installation process:
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 115 Installation: NetLink Installation
1. Determine configuration information: all IP addresses, model IDs, subnet addresses or masks, device aliases, and port numbers. Obtain the information from the network administrator. 2. Use the configuration information and a site disk to create the host table, device table, and device files. Use UpLink to edit, install, and copy the configuration files. 3. Verify the accuracy of the syntax of these files by selecting save and close. If there are no errors, then the files are syntactically correct; otherwise, they are not, and the problem is described in an error message. Edit the files, fix the syntax, and apply until no errors occur. 4. Use the Image Management\Network Administration setups to verify the network configuration (host table, device table, and device files). Verify the printers are displayed in the appropriate lists on the B/W and Color Printer setup panels. 5. Use the Network Configuration Menu to verify the ultrasound system appears in the Ultrasound System Net ID and that all of the archive devices appear in the archive list. After making a selection, reboot is required to assign the correct IP address to the system. 6. Use the Image Management Network Administration setups to create a backup copy of the configuration files on the system hard disk. 7. Select the correct printer and archive device(s). Create an exam, take several images, and close the exam. Verify the images are printed and that the exam appears on all archive devices. 8. If devices are to be added to the device table after the original network installation, use the Upgrade selection or copy new configuration files. 9. Backup the network configuration files after upgrades or modifications to the host or device tables.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 116 Installation: NetLink Installation
Detailed instructions for installing NetLink are contained in the “Image Management” section of the HDI 3500 Reference Manual (P/N 4703-0036-XX).
Host Table, Device Table, and Device Files
The host table must contain the correct alias, IP address, port number, model ID, title, and subnet for each device on the network. The device table maps each model ID in the host table to a file that describes the capability of the device with that model ID. The device files contain the capabilities of single devices that are potential network devices. These capabilities include such things as printer type, film size, film format type, orientation, destination, and density. Most of the attributes or capabilities listed in the device file appear as setups on the Image Management Net Admin: B/W Printers and Color Printers system setups screens. From these screens you can select the settings for these setups. The relationships among the setups is dependent and logical. You must first select a printer type before the film sizes for the printer that you select can be established. The information in the host table, device table, and device files establishes the network configuration. This information must be consistent, or an error message will be displayed on the system monitor when the configuration files are saved. The host table, device table, and device files establish the following relationships and must be setup to reflect the network configuration: •
TCP/IP addressing for server and clients on the network
•
DICOM print connections
•
Print media selection
•
Print media size selection
•
Print film type selection
•
Print orientation selection
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
•
Print contrast and density settings
•
Print format
•
DICOM storage device connections
Page 117 Installation: NetLink Installation
Once the network configuration has been established and set up, create a site disk by copying the host table, device table, and device files.
4730-0036-02
6
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 118 Performance Tests: Introduction
Performance Tests Performance tests are part of the Customer Service Quality Assurance (QA) Program. Also included in the QA program are preventive maintenance inspections and procedures for customer satisfaction.
Introduction
This section contains a series of performance tests to be performed on the system following installation, upgrade, or repair. The purpose of these tests is to verify the correct operation of the system hardware and firmware. The checklist included at the end of this section can be used to ensure that all tests are performed. The major test sections in this procedure are organized to follow a logical progression through each of the major system modes. It is not a requirement to perform the sections in any particular order. However, it is best to perform the tests in the proper order to promote a thorough and consistent testing process.
WARNINGS
•
Measurement accuracy must be verified after installation, after every repair involving PCB or power supply module replacement, and during every preventive maintenance inspection.
•
Wrist straps should not be worn when working on a system with its power turned on. The +5 Vdc supply is a very high-current supply. Use caution when troubleshooting.
NOTE
Before performing these, tests the site power should be inspected in accordance with the pre-site inspection procedures detailed in the Site Inspection section of the General Field Service Manual.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Test Equipment and Materials
Page 119 Performance Tests: Test Equipment and Materials
FSE Tool Kit (P/N 193-90003-01) Tissue Equivalent Phantom [RMI Model 413 (P/N 199-12204-00) or 406 (P/N 4500-8920-01)] ECG/Scanhead Leakage Tester (P/N 6005-0555-01)
Initial Setup WARNING
The following series of tests requires applying power to the system while protective covers are removed. Dangerous voltages are present. Use extreme caution. The initial setup procedure consists of observing system power-up and initialization, verifying system configuration against the customer order acknowledgement (COA), and adjusting the monitor for optimal viewing.
System Power Up and Initialization
This section verifies the status of system power supply voltages as reported by the power supply boards. NOTE
Before proceeding, refer to Section 3, “Safety”, and “Power Subsystem” on page 42, and review the discussion of the three power states (Off, Standby, and On).
1. Turn system off and disconnect power cord before proceeding. 2. Perform the system electrical inspection as described in Section 5, “Installation”. 3. Connect an array scanhead to the system. 4. Turn on all OEMs prior to checking system functionality. 5. Load OEM paper or film, as required.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 120 Performance Tests: Initial Setup
6. Connect the system power cord to a hospital grade AC outlet: specifically, a single branch circuit, 15 or 20 Ampere, 120 Vac, with an isolated and insulated ground wire (or the equivalent International circuit). 7. Set the system circuit breaker to ON (|). 8. Wait 15 seconds, then set the ON/STANDBY switch to ON (?). 9. Verify power indicators are illuminated on internal peripherals. 10. Turn on power to all external peripherals and verify power indicators are illuminated. NOTE
Observe the required warm-up period for each peripheral before conducting image quality tests. Refer to the OEM manual supplied with the peripheral or the appropriate peripheral field service manual.
11. After completion of the initialization process, verify the following: -
The scanhead connected in step 3 of this procedure is selected and enabled.
-
A real-time 2D image is displayed on the monitor (Figure 6-1).
12. Throughout the performance tests, verify the following: -
The image is correctly placed on the video display.
-
The LEDs associated with the buttons on the control panel are lit when that feature is activated.
-
Toggle switches, slidepots, trackball, and other moveable controls operate smoothly and efficiently.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 121 Performance Tests: Initial Setup
Figure 6-1
Power-up Display
System Configuration
Refer to paragraph “Show Installed Options” on page 195 to check the installed system options against the COA.
Monitor Performance
The following procedure is used to set up the monitor for the performance tests in this section and to check the range of contrast and brightness of the monitor. Refer to the control locations in Figure 7-1. NOTE
Refer to “Monitor Adjustments” on page 162 to adjust the monitor for imaging.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
1. Set the background color Color 3).
Page 122 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
to midrange for all three colors (Color 1, Color 2, or
2. Set brightness and contrast black appearance.
to minimum. Verify the video display has a flat
3. Set contrast to maximum. Verify that the level of contrast varies. 4. Adjust the brightness of the lightbar from maximum to minimum. 5. Set the background color, brightness, contrast, and light bar intensity to the factory default settings by simultaneously pressing and holding the up and down controls for each parameter. NOTES • Focus is not currently field adjustable. • You must wait for longer than 30 seconds after changing control settings on 3500-2532-XX monitors (Brightness, Contrast, and Light Bar Intensity) for the settings to be retained in the monitor EEPROM. Turning off the monitor power during this period will require you to reset the control settings. • To improve the ultrasound image, see “Image Optimization” on page 166.
User Interface Tests
The following tests verify various system defaults and user-selectable configuration items, and selection of scanheads and applications.
Keyboard
1. Press Text or Title. Title allows annotation entry in the upper part of screen; Text enters characters at cursor's active position. 2. Press each alphanumeric key and verify the appropriate character is displayed. 3. Press Shift and the arrow keys and verify the appropriate symbols are displayed.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 123 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
4. Press Shift and verify the shift functions for keys with shift characters. 5. Press remaining keys and verify proper operation. For example, Backspace, Return, Erase Text.
Installation Defaults Setup
1. Press the Setups key and select Display. 2. Enter the appropriate Institution name, date, and time. Select the diamonds to select desired time and date formats. 3. Exit Setups.
Patient Data
1. Press Patient Data. 2. Select New. 3. Enter your name in the New Patient field. 4. Enter the system sales order (SO) number in the ID field. 5. Enter your birth date in Date of Birth. 6. Verify your age is displayed correctly. 7. Select Previous Exam Data and Close. 8. Close the Patient Data menu.
Scanhead Initialization
1. Press the Scanhead key. 2. Connect the following scanheads or equivalents as shipped with the system: L12-5 (38 or 50 mm)
L7-4
P4-2 or P5-2
D5CW
C5-2
3. Verify the scanheads connected are correctly displayed. 4. Select the desired scanhead and scanhead application. Verify the correct scanhead is identified at the top of the screen.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 124 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
5. Verify the patient data and other information is correctly displayed and that the clock is updating.
2D Primary Controls
2D Gain NOTE
The TGC graphic on the display does not correlate to the TGC slidepot positions. The TGC graphic on the display represents the actual curve used by the beamformer.
1. Image the 406 or 413 phantom while performing these steps. 2. Set all TGC slidepots to the center position. 3. Verify that adjusting the 2D GAIN from minimum to maximum moves the displayed TGC line from a flat line at the left edge of the depth markers to a flat line at the right edge of the display. 4. Verify that as the 2D GAIN is increased and decreased, there is a corresponding increase and decrease in echo intensity. 5. Set 2D GAIN to mid-range.
TGC Slide Pots 1. If the TGC display is not present, press Setups, select Display and turn TGC Display ON. (Moving a TGC slidepot will only bring up the TGC display for three seconds.) 2. Set 2D GAIN to mid-range or higher. 3. Verify that adjusting each TGC slidepot from minimum to maximum moves the corresponding portion of the displayed TGC line from the left edge of the depth markers to the right edge of the display. 4. Verify that increasing and decreasing the TGC gain results in a corresponding increase and decrease in echo intensity (depends on overall gain settings).
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 125 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
5. Set all TGC slidepots to the center position.
Focal Zones (number of focal zones) 1. Verify that pressing ZONES up increases the number of focal zones. 2. Verify that pressing ZONES down decreases the number of focal zones.
Focus 1. Verify that pressing FOCUS up moves the focal zone up. 2. Verify that pressing FOCUS down moves the focal zone down.
Depth 1. Verify that pressing DEPTH up decreases the displayed depth and that the frame rate increases. 2. Verify that pressing DEPTH down increases the displayed depth and that the frame rate decreases.
Output 1. Verify that pressing OUTPUT up increases the Mechanical and Thermal Indices. 2. Verify that pressing OUTPUT down decreases the Mechanical and Thermal Indices.
Top/Bottom 1. Verify that pressing TOP/BOT inverts the image top to bottom. 2. Verify that depth markers, focal zone marker, and the orientation marker invert. 3. Verify that adjusting the top TGC slide pot still controls the near field part of the image while the image is inverted.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 126 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
L/R Invert 1. Place the scanhead on the phantom with the orientation marker to the left. Verify the image orientation marker corresponds to the orientation mark on the scanhead. 2. Verify pressing L/R INVERT switches the image and the orientation marker left to right.
Sector Width 1. With a sector scanhead, verify that pressing SEC WIDTH down decreases the sector width. 2. Verify the frame rate increases as the sector width is decreased. 3. Verify that pressing SEC WIDTH up increases the sector width. 4. Verify the frame rate decreases as the sector width is increased.
Zoom 1. Verify that pressing ZOOM up increases the image magnification. 2. Verify the image orientation marker repositions to the far upper left of the display. 3. Verify the depth markers re-scale with the zoomed image. 4. Verify that moving the trackball allows all portions of the image to be viewed. 5. Set the zoom to normal magnification. 6. Verify the image, image orientation marker, and depth markers return to the normal state.
HD Zoom 1. Press HD ZOOM and verify the zoom box is displayed and that the trackball will position the box anywhere within the image.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 127 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
2. Verify that pressing SELECT fixes the position of the upper left corner of the box and that the trackball now positions the lower right corner of the box to size it. 3. Position and size the box to surround a distinct feature (cysts or pins) within the phantom. 4. Press HD ZOOM and verify the image zooms so that the area defined within the box is displayed to fill the image. 5. Press HD ZOOM and verify the image returns to normal magnification and that the box is no longer displayed.
Dual 1. Press DUAL and verify the sector is displayed on the left half of the display and is updating. 2. Press UPDATE and verify another sector is displayed on the right half of the display. 3. Verify the right sector is updating and the left sector is frozen. 4. Press UPDATE to toggle the live and frozen images from the left sector to the right, and the right sector to the left. 5. Verify that adjusting any imaging control affects only the live sector and that each sector independently retains its imaging control settings from the last time it was active. 6. Press DUAL and verify a single full size sector is displayed.
2D Secondary Controls
Initial Setup 1. Select 2D mode and the desired scanhead that supports Power Imaging. 2. Press 2D/MM to call up the 2D secondary control menu.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 128 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
Gray Maps 1. Verify that selecting - or + GMap changes the gray map number, the gray scale assignment of the gray bar, and the image data. 2. Select Close between each map selection to observe changes.
Dynamic Range 1. Select PWR IMG. 2. Select PWR from the MENU controls. 3. Verify that selecting Dyn Rng changes the menu display through the range of Low, Med, High, and Max. Verify the range of echoes in the image display vary from high contrast to smooth.
Chroma 1. Select Chroma. 2. Select Chroma 1. 3. Verify that when Chroma is selected the 2D portion of the image is colorized. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for Chroma 2, Chroma 3, and Chroma 4. 5. Select Off from the 2D secondary control menu. 6. Select Close twice to return to 2D imaging. NOTE
Chroma mapping allows the assignment of colors to gray scale echo intensities. No diagnostic claims are made for Chroma mapping. There are Chroma maps available on the 2D/M-Mode menu.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 129 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
Persistence Verify that increasing persistence smooths the image and mid-level echoes move in slow motion in response to scanhead movement. 1. Press 2D/MM, select Persistence - Low, then Close. 2. Move the scanhead right and left. Note motion. 3. Press 2D/MM, select Persistence - High, then Close. 4. Move the scanhead right and left. Compare motion to the motion in step 2.
2D Line Density 1. Select the desired scanhead and application. 2. Verify that increasing line density increases the sharpness of the resolution pins displayed in the image. 3. Verify that increasing line density decreases the frame rate.
Frame Rate Change frame rate and verify that increasing frame rate increases the frame rate displayed on the monitor.
Biopsy 1. Select a CIVT (or a fake CIVT) scanhead. 2. Select Generic and General (clinical option and Tissue Specific preset) to initialize the scanhead. 3. Select Biopsy on the 2D/MM menu. 4. Verify the trackball moves the cursor up and down the biopsy guideline and the distance is displayed in the lower center of the screen.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 130 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
5. Return to 2D/MM menu and deselect Biopsy.
2D Color Primary Controls
Initial Setup 1. Select a scanhead. 2. Select 2D Color mode.
Color Box 1. Verify the trackball will position the Color Box anywhere within the image. 2. Verify that pressing SELECT fixes the position of the upper left corner of the box and that the trackball now positions the lower right corner of the box to size it.
Steer (Linear Scanheads Only) 1. Press STEER. Verify the color box changes shape shifting left or right pivoting around its center. 2. Press STEER again several times. Verify the system cycles through the various steering angles on the display.
Filter Verify the FILTER control changes the screen annotation.
Baseline 1. Press BASELINE up and verify the baseline of the color bar moves to the top of the color bar and that the color scale updates accordingly. 2. Press BASELINE down and verify the baseline of the color bar moves to the bottom of the color bar and that the color scale updates accordingly.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 131 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
Scale Verify that pressing SCALE up and down will increase and decrease the range of the color bar scale and varies the PRF value displayed.
Priority 1. Press PRIORITY up and verify the write priority mark on the gray bar moves to the top of the bar and color overwrites the corresponding gray shades. 2. Press PRIORITY down and verify the write priority mark on the gray bar moves to the bottom of the gray bar and gray shades overwrite the color.
Invert Press INVERT and verify the color bar inverts.
2D Color Secondary Controls
Initial Setup 1. Connect any phased, curved, or linear scanhead to the system. 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset. 3. Select Color Mode. 4. Display the color annotation. 5. Press the Color menu button.
Color Maps 1. Select Color Maps. 2. Verify that selecting each of the color maps changes the color assignment of the color bar.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 132 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
Persistence 1. Select Persistence. 2. Verify that selecting higher settings slow the color image update rate.
Line Density Verify that selecting higher settings increases the image sharpness and lower settings produce a higher frame rate. Selecting A displays a higher frame rate and D a lower frame rate.
Color Display 1. Press Superkey and CDisp. 2. Verify the color bar and the image color data are not displayed. 3. Press Superkey and CDisp. 4. Verify the color bar and the image color data are displayed.
Units Verify that selecting FREQ or VEL changes the scaling annotation of the color bar. NOTE
Doppler Primary Controls
Units do not apply to Power mode.
Initial Setup 1. Select PULSED. 2. Verify the Doppler image information is displayed. 3. Select and initialize the L12-5 scanhead (L10-5 can also be used). 4. Press UPDATE. 5. Verify the Doppler display is scrolling.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 133 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
Wall Filter Press FILTER up and verify the wall filter annotation changes from low to medium to high.
Baseline Press BASELINE up and down to verify the Doppler baseline can be positioned from the top to the bottom of the scale.
Scale Press SCALE up and down to verify the range displayed on the Doppler scale changes and the PRF changes.
Angle Correction 1. Press 0/60° and verify the M-line changes from +60° to -60° to 0°. 2. Press ANG COR. Verify the M-line moves and the annotation graphics update by 2° increments.
Sample Volume Size Press SV SIZE and verify the displayed sample volume changes size and the annotation is updated with the new size.
Steer (Linear Scanheads Only) Press STEER and verify the system cycles through each of the steering angles and the M-line pivots around the sample volume. NOTE
Position the M-line near the center of the image to see each of the three steering angles.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 134 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
Invert Press INVERT and verify the Doppler spectral data and the scale inverts relative to the baseline.
Volume 1. Obtain a spectral trace. 2. Press VOLUME up or down and verify the speaker volume increases and decreases. 3. Verify frequencies above the center frequency emanate from the left speaker and headphone, and frequencies below the center frequency emanate from the right speaker and headphone.
Doppler Secondary Controls
NOTE
Obtain a Doppler image (phantom or live) while performing the tests in this section. Obtain the Doppler phantom from the customer.
Initial Setup 1. Connect any phased, curved, or linear scanhead to the system. 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset. 3. Select PULSED. 4. Press the DOPPLER menu button to display the Doppler secondary control menu.
Doppler Gray Maps 1. Select Gray Maps. 2. Verify that selecting each of the gray maps changes the grayscale assignment of the Doppler data. 3. Verify the selected grayscale map is displayed in the Doppler annotation.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 135 Performance Tests: User Interface Tests
Scale Units Verify the Doppler scale displays the scale units selected.
Doppler Sweep Speed 1. Select each Doppler sweep speed. 2. Verify the right to left display movement (sweep speed) changes accordingly.
Display Format 1. Select the Small, Medium, and Large display formats and verify the Doppler display changes accordingly. 2. Select 2D.
M-mode Primary Controls
Initial Setup 1. Connect any phased, curved, or linear scanhead to the system. 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset. 3. Select M-mode.
M-Line Verify the trackball smoothly moves the M-line from the left image edge to the right image edge.
M-mode Secondary Controls
Initial Setup Press 2D/MM to display the 2D/M-mode secondary control menu.
Sweep Speed 1. Select Speed. 2. Verify that as higher settings are selected, the M-mode display rate increases.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 136 Performance Tests: Image Quality
Display Format Select the Small, Medium, and Large display formats and verify the M-mode display changes accordingly.
Image Quality 2D
2D Penetration 1. Select a scanhead and TSI you wish to test. 2. Set DEPTH and FOCUS depth to maximum. 3. Scan the phantom to obtain an image that clearly shows both the horizontal and vertical rows of pins. Position the scanhead for optimal image of pins. 4. Press FREEZE. NOTE
Always apply the phantom reference value and tolerance to the measurement.
5. Select Distance and set the distance caliper at the deepest vertical position where the scatter echoes start to break up and tissue definition is lost. 6. Press Distance again to display the numerical value of penetration. 7. Verify scanhead and system performance to expected values of scanhead and settings used.
2D Axial and Lateral Resolution 1. Adjust the position of the scanhead on the phantom to obtain an image that clearly shows both the horizontal and vertical rows of pins. 2. Verify the image presents a uniform homogeneous echo pattern from the point of closest focus to the limit of penetration.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 137 Performance Tests: Image Quality
3. Adjust the focal zone position to correspond to the depth of a cyst at the depth of your desired measurement (depending on the scanhead and presets selected). 1mm 3mm 2mm 1mm .5mm
4. Verify the cystic structure at the focal zone is echo free, round, and with sharp wall definition. 5. Obtain an optimal phantom image of a set of graduated resolution pins within the focal zone. Refer to the diagram (left). Distances between pins may vary by phantom model. Reference your phantom user manual for measurement details.
6. To determine axial resolution, use the values indicated in the left column. The first adjacent pins that display a space between them on your image is considered resolved. -
Example: If the phantom image displays white between the second and third pins from the bottom, the axial resolution is 1mm.
7. To measure lateral resolution, use the calipers to measure the width of a pin at the focal zone depth. It will always measure wider than the actual pin diameter.
2D Spatial Resolution and Measurement Accuracy Phantom elements should appear on the display relative to their actual location on the phantom, and the system calipers should accurately measure them. 1. Adjust the position of the selected scanhead on the phantom to obtain an image that clearly shows both the horizontal and vertical rows of pins. 2. Press FREEZE. 3. Using the system calipers, measure the distance between the centers of two pins that are vertically spaced apart. Select pins that are near and far, not adjacent pins.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 138 Performance Tests: Image Quality
4. Measure the distance between the centers of two pins that are horizontally spaced and compare to your phantom specifications.
Cineloop Manual Playback 1. Slowly slide the scanhead across the phantom. 2. Press FREEZE. 3. Verify the trackball movement left or right scrolls through the captured Cineloop frames.
Cineloop Automatic Playback 1. Display the Cineloop menu. 2. Verify the Play/Pause starts and pauses Cineloop and the image data indicates Loop. 3. Verify that selecting Sweep/Loop changes between sweep and loop mode and the image data reflects the current mode selected. 4. Verify that selecting + Speed increases the playback speed. 5. Verify that selecting - Speed decreases the playback speed. 6. Verify that selecting Trim displays the Cineloop trim graphic. 7. Verify the trackball and SELECT allow positioning of both trim markers. 8. Verify that selecting Play/Pause loops through the frames defined by the trim markers.
Annotation 1. Connect a P4-2 scanhead to the system. 2. Select the Adult Card/General optimized preset.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 139 Performance Tests: Image Quality
3. Press Body Marker and verify a body marker is displayed. Press again and verify the system scrolls through the various body markers. 4. Use the trackball to position the body marker anywhere within the image. 5. Press Superkey and SH Pos. Verify the scanhead marker is displayed on the body marker. 6. Use the trackball to position the scanhead marker anywhere within the body marker. 7. Press Superkey and SH Pos. Verify the scanhead marker is rotated. 8. Press Erase Screen. Verify the body marker and scanhead marker are cleared from the display. 9. Press Title to display the cursor in the default home position. Enter data into the title field. 10. Press Erase Text. Verify the text disappears from the display. 11. Press Text to display the cursor in the default home position. Enter data into the title field. 12. Press Erase Text. Verify the text disappears from the display. 13. Press Title to exit the annotation function.
Color Power Angio
Initial Setup 1. Connect an L12-5 scanhead to the system. 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset. 3. Select Power Imaging Mode. 4. Obtain an image that clearly shows fluid flow. 5. Verify the power imaging background is of uniform texture and color. 6. Verify the colorized Doppler information is displayed within the vessel.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 140 Performance Tests: Image Quality
7. Display the PWR secondary menu.
Power Maps 1. Select Power Maps. 2. Verify that selecting each of the color maps changes the color assignment of the color bar and the power imaging background.
Persistence 1. Select Persistence. 2. Verify that selecting higher settings slow the color image update rate.
Line Density Verify that selecting higher settings increases the image sharpness and lower settings produce a higher frame rate. Selecting A displays a higher frame rate and D a lower frame rate.
3D CPA 1. Adjust the scanhead position to obtain an image that clearly shows fluid flow. 2. Press 3D UNCAL and acquire data. 3. Press FREEZE. 4. Press 3D/CINE to display the Cineloop secondary menu. 5. Select Create 3D or press 3D CAPTURE. 6. Verify the system indicates it is rendering a 3D image. 7. When rendering is complete, verify the system is sweeping through the 3D Cineloop. 8. Press FREEZE.
4730-0036-02
Simultaneous Modes
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 141 Performance Tests: Image Quality
Initial Setup 1. Connect an L12-5 scanhead to the system. 2. Select the Cerebrovascular/Carotid optimized preset.
Simultaneous 2D + PW Doppler 1. Select PULSED. 2. Press DOPPLER MENU to display the Doppler secondary control menu. 3. Select 2D Update. 4. Select Simul. 5. Verify both 2D and Doppler are active.
Simultaneous 2D + PW Doppler + Color 1. Select Color mode. 2. If the Doppler secondary control menu is not displayed, press DOPPLER MENU. 3. Select 2D Update. 4. Select Simul. 5. Verify the 2D, Doppler, and Color are active.
Simultaneous 2D + PW Doppler + CPA 1. Press PULSED. 2. If the Doppler secondary control menu is not displayed, press DOPPLER MENU. 3. Select 2D Update. 4. Select Simul. 5. Select 2D mode.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 142 Performance Tests: Image Quality
6. Select Power Imaging. 7. Verify the 2D, Doppler, and CPA are active.
PW Doppler Noise Bands
1. Connect a P4-2 scanhead to the system. 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset. 3. Select Doppler mode. 4. Set the system controls as indicated in Table 6-1. Table 6-1
PW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings
Control
Setting
Output Maximum Sample Volume Depth 9.0 cm Sample Volume Size 1.5 mm 5. Reduce the Doppler gain until the background noise disappears. 6. Observe the spectral display for noise bands. 7. Obtain a Doppler spectral trace. 8. Increase and decrease the PRF and observe the display for noise bands. 9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 for sample volume sizes of 2, 3, and 5 mm.
Steered CW Doppler Noise Bands
1. Connect a P4-2 scanhead to the system. 2. Select the Generic/General optimized preset. 3. Select Doppler mode. 4. Set the system controls as indicated in Table 6-2.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 6-2
Page 143 Performance Tests: Image Quality
Steered CW Doppler Noise Band Control Settings
Control
Setting
Output Maximum Sample Volume Depth 9.0 cm 5. Press CW. 6. Press UPDATE. 7. Adjust the Doppler gain to obtain clearly visible background noise in the scrolling display. 8. Adjust the D-line 15 degrees around the centerline of the 2D image to locate the position that produces the most CW noise. 9. Adjust the Doppler gain according to Table 6-3 and verify the spectral display is clear of noise bands. 10. Repeat this procedure using the P5-3 scanhead. Table 6-3
CW Doppler Gain Control Settings for Noise Band Tests Doppler Gain
PRF (Hz)
P4-2
P5-3
41667 31250
53 56
52 55
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 6-3
Page 144 Performance Tests: Image Quality
CW Doppler Gain Control Settings for Noise Band Tests (Continued) Doppler Gain
DiskLink
PRF (Hz)
P4-2
P5-3
25000 20000 15625 14286 11905 10000 8333 5000 3731 2500 1515
59 61 65 66 69 72 75 83 86 93 95
58 61 65 66 69 72 75 83 86 93 95
Begin Exam 1. Press Patient Data. 2. Select New. 3. Enter your name in the name field. 4. Press Patient Data to begin the new exam.
Storing Black and White Images 1. Press PRINT to store the image to the hard disk.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 145 Performance Tests: Image Quality
2. Verify the system freezes the image. 3. Verify the system beeps. 4. Verify the system unfreezes the image. 5. Verify the Page Format Graphic and the Print Store Nonessential Annotation indicates a black and white image has been stored. 6. Press FREEZE. 7. Press PRINT to store six additional images. 8. Press DEL IMG. 9. Select Delete. 10. Verify the Page Format Graphic and the Print Store Nonessential Annotation indicates the last black and white image has been deleted.
Storing Color Images 1. Select Color mode. 2. Increase the Color gain until color pixels are displayed. 3. Press PRINT to store the image to the hard disk. 4. Verify the system freezes the image. 5. Verify the system beeps. 6. Verify the system unfreezes the image. 7. Verify the Page Format Graphic and the Print Store Nonessential Annotation indicates a color image has been stored. 8. Press FREEZE. 9. Press PRINT to store six additional images.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 146 Performance Tests: Image Quality
10. Press DEL IMG. 11. Select Delete. 12. Verify the Page Format Graphic and the Print Store Nonessential Annotation indicates the last color image has been deleted. 13. Press END EXAM.
Reviewing Images 1. Press NET/DISK. 2. Select Hard Disk to display the exam directory on the hard disk. 3. Verify the information entered for the exam just completed is correct. 4. Select the exam just completed. 5. Select Review Images. 6. Select the Zoom Graphic on one of the stored images. 7. Verify the image is displayed in one-on-one format. 8. Select Meas/Edit. 9. Verify the image appears like a normal acquisition screen. 10. Press REVIEW. 11. Verify the image is displayed in multi-image format.
Copying Images 1. Begin a new exam. 2. Press PRINT to store an image. 3. Press END EXAM. 4. Insert a formatted optical disk in the system drive.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 147 Performance Tests: Image Quality
5. Press REVIEW. 6. Select Exam Dir to display the list of exams on the hard disk. 7. Select the last exam. 8. Select Copy To, then select OK to copy the exam to the optical disk. 9. Display the Exam Directory on the optical disk. 10. Select the exam just copied to the optical disk. 11. Select Copy To, then select OK to copy the exam to the hard disk. 12. Display the Exam Directory on the hard disk. 13. Select the exam just copied to the hard disk. 14. Select Review Images. 15. Verify the image quality of each of the images is the same and the image quality has not degraded. 16. Press Patient Data. 17. Select New. Do not enter data in the Name or ID fields. 18. Press Patient Data to begin the new exam. 19. Display the Exam Directory on the hard disk. 20. Delete all exams. 21. Display the Exam Directory on the optical disk. 22. Delete all exams. 23. Press Setups. 24. Select Image Management. 25. Select Printer Selection to display the Image Management Printer setup display.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 148 Performance Tests: Image Quality
26. Set the printer setup options as indicated in Table 6-4. Table 6-4
Image Management Printer Setup Options
Option
Setting
B&W Film Format Color Film Format Printed Image Destination
2-on-1 4-on-1 B/W to B/W Printer, Color to Color Printer
NOTE
If Printed Image Destination is set to All to B/W Printer, the images stored to the optical disk will be black-and-white images only.
27. Select Setups Directory. 28. Select Image Management. 29. Select General Options. 30. For the “Store Images During Exam” option, select “At End of Exam.” 31. Select Close. 32. Press NET/DISK and eject the optical disk by selecting Eject Disk.
NetLink
1. Press Setups. 2. Select Image Management. 3. Select Printers. 4. Select Color or B&W print destination. 5. Select Close. 6. Press Patient Data. 7. Select New.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 149 Performance Tests: Image Quality
8. Enter your name in the name field. 9. Press Patient Data to begin the new exam. 10. Scan an RM-413 phantom. 11. Save the image and the exam. 12. Press END EXAM to end the exam. 13. Press PRINT and verify the image has been printed on the network printer.
ECG
1. Connect a P4-2 scanhead to the system. 2. Select the Adult Card/General preset. 3. Connect the ECG cable to the system. 4. Connect the white ECG cable to the RA terminals on the ECG simulator, the black cable to the LA terminals, and the red cable to the LL terminals. 5. Set the ECG simulator settings as indicated in Table 6-5. Table 6-5
ECG Simulator Option Settings
Option
Setting
Output Rate OFF/ECG/PULSE
2.0 mV 180 BPM ECG
6. Verify the ECG R wave is a positive going pulse. 7. Verify the measured heart rate stabilizes at 180 BPM ±1 BPM. 8. Set the ECG simulator rate to 120. 9. Verify the measured heart rate stabilizes at 120 BPM ±1 BPM. 10. Set the ECG simulator rate to 60.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 150 Performance Tests: Image Quality
11. Verify the measured heart rate stabilizes at 60 BPM ±1 BPM. 12. Display the physio secondary control menu. 13. Increase and decrease the ECG gain. Verify the amplitude of the ECG waveform increases and decreases. 14. Increase and decrease the ECG position. Verify the vertical position of the ECG waveform moves up and down on the display. 15. Select Configure. 16. Set Trigger A and Trigger B to on. 17. Slowly increase and decrease the A Delay. Verify the A Trigger above the ECG waveform moves to the right and left. 18. Slowly increase and decrease the B Delay. Verify the B Trigger above the ECG waveform moves to the right and left. 19. Position both triggers so they are clearly visible. 20. Press UPDATE to enable trigger mode. 21. Slowly slide the scanhead across the phantom and verify the image is updated at each trigger. 22. Slowly slide the scanhead across the phantom again, then press FREEZE. 23. Verify the Trackball movement left or right scrolls the Cineloop marker along the ECG waveform and the image is updated as the marker crosses each trigger. 24. Press FREEZE and verify the image updates continuously. 25. Select M-mode. 26. Center the ECG waveform in the vertical center of the M-mode display. 27. Set the ECG simulator rate to 30.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 151 Performance Tests: Image Quality
28. Verify the measured heart rate stabilizes at 30 BPM ±1 BPM. 29. Observe the ECG waveform. Press FREEZE as soon as a new QRS waveform is displayed. 30. Display the Meas secondary control menu. 31. Select Time/Slope. 32. Position the cursor on a distinct point on the QRS waveform and press SELECT. 33. Position the second cursor on the corresponding location on the next QRS waveform to the left or right. 34. Verify the measured time interval is 2.00s ±0.04s. 35. Press DEL MEAS. 36. Disconnect the ECG simulator.
Multiplane TEE Scanhead Face Temperature
Refer to the Multiplane TEE Scanhead Service Manual (4720-0292-01) to determine whether the particular ultrasound system and scanhead are capable of detecting a scanhead over-temperature condition.
ISEM Tests
System Setup 1. Press SETUP. 2. Select Peripheral from the Directory of Setups Options. 3. Set the Internal Printer option to Select Sony Color. 4. Exit Setups. 5. Connect a cardiology (P4-2) scanhead to the system. 6. Select the Adult Card/General preset. 7. Select 2D Color mode.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 152 Performance Tests: Image Quality
8. Display a large color box filled with color.
ISEM Setup 1. Verify the system LED is lit on the video control box. 2. Select Stress Echo as the video source. Verify the ISEM menu bar is displayed above a blue screen, and the Stress Echo LED is lit. 3. Select Digital/Live. Verify the system video is displayed. 4. Select Setup on the Menu Bar. 5. Select Input Source. 6. Verify the video source options are as indicated in Table 6-6. Table 6-6
ISEM Video Source Settings
Parameter
Setting
Video Source Video Sync Type ECG Source Machine Type
RGB Composite Hidden HDI 3500
7. Select OK. 8. Select Setup on the menu bar, then select Video Calibration. 9. Set the video calibration settings as indicated in Table 6-7. Table 6-7 Parameter Audible ECG
ISEM Video Calibration Settings Setting On
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 6-7 ECG Threshold Brightness Contrast Graphics
Page 153 Performance Tests: Image Quality
ISEM Video Calibration Settings (Continued) 23% 60% 50% 68%
10. Select OK. 11. Select Setup on the menu bar, then select Control Panel. 12. Set the date and time setup options as indicated in Table 6-8. Table 6-8 Parameter Date Format Time Date Mouse Tracking Speed
ISEM Date and Time Setup Options Setting Month-Day-Year Current Time Current Date Default Value
13. Click on Done to close the Control Panel window. 14. Press CNTL+N to begin a new patient. 15. Enter your name into the name field. 16. Enter a made-up ID number into the ID field. 17. Select OK.
ISEM Footswitch 1. Press ALT+A and select Page-full, then OK. Verify the footswitch icons are displayed.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 154 Performance Tests: Image Quality
2. Press the left footswitch and verify the system indicates the images are being captured. 3. Press the middle footswitch and verify the system indicates it is preparing the image for storage. 4. Press the right footswitch and verify the footswitch icons and the status bar disappear.
ISEM Hand Controller 1. Press ALT+A and select Page-full, then OK. Verify the footswitch icons are displayed. 2. Press the key on the hand controller and verify the system indicates the images are being captured. 3. Press the
key on the hand controller and verify the system indicates it is pre-
paring the image for storage. 4. Capture several more images. 5. Press the
key on the hand controller and verify the footswitch icons and the
status bar disappear. 6. Select 2D mode.
Image Review 1. Select Patient Files then select Patient Directory. 2. Select a patient name. 3. Select Load. 4. Verify the menu bar indicates image x of y, where x is the image number and y is the number of images captured.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 155 Performance Tests: Image Quality
5. Press the left and right arrow keys on the hand controller to sequence through the images. Verify each of the images accurately reflect the system image.
Hard Disk Clean-up 1. Select Display, then select Close all Collections. 2. Select Patient Files, then select Patient Directory and OK. NOTE
Do not delete the patient files named “TEST, NTSC (or PAL), and Monitor Setup.
3. Highlight the patient entries created during this test, then select Delete and OK. 4. Verify the selected files have been deleted. 5. Select Cancel. 6. Select System as the video source. Verify the system monitor is no longer displaying ISEM video, and the System LED is lit.
OEM Tests
OEMs are only tested for basic functionality and their interface to the system.
VCR 1. Press COLOR. 2. Press RECORD and verify the VCR begins recording. 3. Record several minutes of image data and audio. 4. Rewind the cassette and press PLAY. 5. Verify the playback image is stable. 6. Adjust Doppler gain and color gain. Verify color hue and intensity are adjusted on the monitor. 7. Verify the audio plays back.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 156 Performance Tests: Image Quality
8. Pause the image during playback. 9. Verify the paused image is stable. 10. While in the Pause mode, verify the VCR will search forward and reverse where the speed of the search is dependent on the directional movement of the VCR search control. 11. Verify the positive flow audio is on the left speaker, and the negative flow is on the right speaker. 12. Verify the audio volume can be varied with the volume control. 13. Press STOP on the VCR. 14. Press VCR CTRL and verify operation of the softkeys. 15. Press EJECT on the VCR.
B/W Video Printer Verify that pressing PRINT initiates a B/W hardcopy print.
Color Video Printer 1. Select Color Doppler mode and obtain a color image. 2. Press PRINT to take a print. 3. Verify the print LED blinks when PRINT is pressed, and 45 to 90 seconds later, blinks again three times to indicate completion of print (refer to the color printer service manual). 4. Verify the prints have the correct image size, blanking, and color reproduction.
Multi-image Camera 1. Acquire an image using a tissue equivalent phantom (RMI 406 or 413).
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 157 Performance Tests: Image Quality
2. Set the system depth, TGC, and gain controls to mid-range. Adjust the 2D maps to achieve a mid-level gray. 3. Press FREEZE. 4. Take a print of a positive 2D image and a print of a scrolling video display (M-mode or Doppler). 5. Take six exposures for each sheet of film. After the sixth exposure, verify the camera alternately displays “Complete” then “Remove Cassette”. 6. Re-install the dark slide with the black border of the dark slide outward, and remove the film cassette from the camera. 7. Process the film and verify the following: a. There is no video blanking visible within 1.0 mm of any image border. b. The graybar transitions evenly from white to black. c. The print graphics are clear, legible, and not cut-off. d. The print density is even throughout the print. e. There is no fogging, chemical marks, roller scratches, smudges, or light leaks.
Performance Test Checklist
Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Video Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Control Panel Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 158 Performance Tests: Image Quality
Menu controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Dedicated pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Footswitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Trackball . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Miscellaneous controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ 2D Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Gain, Output, and Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ 2D Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Biopsy Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Cineloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Save-Recall Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Color Power Angio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ 2D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Color Capture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Spectral Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Pulsed Doppler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Spectral Doppler Auto Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Simultaneous Spectral Doppler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 159 Performance Tests: Image Quality
M-Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Simultaneous M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Dual M-Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ HD Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ DiskLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ NetLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ ECG/Physio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Heart Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Phased Array Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Scanhead Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Focal Zones and Focal Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Sector Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Linear Array Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Scanhead Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Focal Zones and Focal Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Curved Array Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Scanhead Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Focal Zones and Focal Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 160 Performance Tests: Image Quality
Multi-plane TEE Scanhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Internal Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Multi-Image Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Page Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ ISEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ External Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Rear Panel Port Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Miscellaneous Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Microphone and Audio Dub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑ Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ❑
4730-0036-02
7
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 162 Adjustments: Power Supply Voltage Adjustments
Adjustments
Power Supply Voltage Adjustments
There are no power supply voltage adjustments. The voltages can be measured on the PSM rear panel. Refer to Section 9, “Troubleshooting”, for the test point locations. If a voltage is out of tolerance, the system will not automatically shut down, but may attempt to cycle power continuously, until the system is manually shut off, and the PSM is replaced. Voltages are monitored by the FEC.
Monitor Adjustments
The HDI 3500 has FIMI or Microvitec (MV) designed monitors. The same external controls are used to adjust the display, but there are slight differences in the displayed menus. The FIMI monitor has more contrast range and a background tint function, while the Microvitec (MV) has an extra background balance setting. Monitor field adjustments include contrast, brightness, color background, and lightbar. Refer to Figure 7-1 for control locations. Additional field adjustments are available on the FIMI monitor through a menu selection, see “To access FIMI monitor menus:” on page 164. Additional adjustments for the MV monitor require special tools and test instruments and are not field adjustable. NOTE
See also “Monitor Performance” on page 121
The adjustment settings are retained in an EEPROM in the monitor. Microvitec has a delay of 30 seconds between the time the adjustment is made and the time the settings are stored. If the ultrasound system is powered down before the MV monitor has stored the new settings, the previous control settings are used when the monitor is powered up. When a control is pressed, the current control setting is displayed for approximately 3 seconds. The following procedure will work for either monitor.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
NOTE
Adjusting the Monitor to the Factory Defaults
Page 163 Adjustments: Monitor Adjustments
The following Monitor adjustment procedure applies to both the FIMI and Microvitek monitors unless otherwise noted.
Adjustments can be set to factory default settings or to any setting desired by the user. Factory default values are chosen to give optimal monitor display quality for most clinical applications and should satisfy most users. Default settings are recommended. Refer to Figure 7-1 for control locations. ➤ To set monitor controls to the factory default settings: 1. Simultaneously press the up and down contrast controls twice. The default value of 80 is displayed. 2. Simultaneously press the up and down brightness controls twice. The default value of 20 is displayed for the MV monitor and 32 for the FIMI monitor. 3. Simultaneously press the lightbar controls twice to set the light intensity. MV monitor will display a default value of 16 on the monitor. A value is not displayed on the FIMI monitor. 4. Press the background color control to select the background color on the display. Color 1 is the factory default option. 5. To store the factory default settings in the MV monitor EEPROM, wait over 30 seconds before powering down the system. There is no delay for the FIMI monitor.
Adjusting the Monitor for Optimal Viewing
The purpose of this procedure is to optimize the monitor. It does not impact the ultrasound imaging quality. Refer to “Image Optimization” on page 166, or “Imaging” in the HDI 3500 Getting Started Manual, to optimize the ultrasound image.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 164 Adjustments: Monitor Adjustments
➤ To adjust the monitor for optimal viewing: 1. Set all the monitor settings to default values first, see “Adjusting the Monitor to the Factory Defaults” on page 163. 2. Set background color to Color 1 for General Imaging and Color 2 for Cardiology applications. (Color 1 adds a blue tint to the background, Color 2 is neutral, and on the MV monitor Color 3 adds a red tint.) The FIMI monitor has colors 1 and 2, which are equivalent to 1 and 2 on the MV monitor. 3. Press contrast up and down controls to optimize the display to user preference. 4. Adjust the lightbar intensity to user preference. NOTE
To retain the monitor settings, the Microvitec monitor requires a 30-second wait after setting controls before powering down.
➤ To access FIMI monitor menus: 1. Power off the system. 2. Power on the system while simultaneously pressing the contrast up and down controls on the monitor control panel. (Press for 5 seconds) 3. Press the color select control. A Main Menu is displayed. 4. Press the contrast and brightness up and down controls to select menu functions. 5. Parameters including image size, centering, and aspect are available for fine adjustments. Follow menu prompts to make monitor adjustments or to check firmware version and operational hours. 6. Exit the menu, changes are saved after exiting the menu. NOTE
Do not select Service Menu items. Special factory equipment is required to make adjustments in the Service Menu.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 165 Adjustments: Monitor Adjustments
Background color selection Lightbar brightness
Monitor brightness
Monitor contrast Figure 7-1
Monitor Control Locations
4730-0036-02
Image Optimization
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 166 Adjustments: Image Optimization
There is variation in the monitor brightness and contrast settings from user to user. The recommendation is to set the monitor contrast to 80 and brightness to 20 for the MV monitor and 32 for the FIMI. Higher brightness levels produce flat images. This setting consistently provides clean images without noise. Other factors that impact image quality are as follows: •
•
TGC controls -
TGC slide pots are returned to a straight line BEFORE selecting a new TSI. It is critical to obtaining a good image and necessary to get the full range of adjustment.
-
Setting the TGC controls in a straight line may not result in the perfect image, since imaging varies with anatomy. Manual manipulation is necessary to obtain an optimal image. Optimal image for each patient may not result in a smooth TGC ramp.
Dynamic Range Compression Settings -
Use the COMPRESS control to vary the Dynamic Range and the compression curve applied. The default setting reads 130dB/C4.
-
A higher compression setting reduces noise levels in the image, optimal for shallow imaging of high-velocity vessels.
-
A lower setting increases contrast and sensitivity, optimal for deep low-velocity vessels.
-
Bring up the compression in THI to give the image a slightly more fundamental look.
-
For General Imaging situations, try bringing this down to C2, depending on the scanning situation and personal preferences.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 167 Adjustments: Image Optimization
•
Gray Maps: There are dedicated gray maps for General Imaging and Cardiac Imaging. Toggle through these to find the best fit for a customer.
•
Output Control: The OUTPUT control, formerly called POWER, varies the amount of energy the scanhead emits. In certain clinical situations, reducing output may help decrease artifacts. This is especially true for reverberation artifacts seen in vessels and in a uterus with a posterior placenta. Reducing output may not remove them completely, but it will improve the image. Use in conjunction with gain.
•
Look for the best echo window -
Move the transducer around and take advantage of any fluid pockets or uniform tissue present.
-
Artifacts seen from one view may be entirely absent from a different window. Partial volume artifacts around cystic structures are an example here. Do your best to avoid the curving walls of cystic structures and help the customer understand this.
4730-0036-02
8
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 168 Preventive Maintenance: Fan Filter
Preventive Maintenance Preventive maintenance inspections are part of the Customer Service Quality Assurance (QA) Program. Also included in the QA program are performance tests and procedures for ensuring customer satisfaction.
Fan Filter
1. Remove the filter (PN 2950-1148-01) from under the front of the system. 2. Vacuum and reinstall the filter. 3. Demonstrate filter cleaning procedure to customer.
Optical Disk Drive Head Cleaning
The recommended interval for cleaning the lens (head) internal to the (optional) optical disk drive is once every six months. The procedure for head cleaning is to insert a head-cleaning cartridge (P/N 2100-1419-01) into the optical drive with power applied. The head-cleaning cartridge will load, automatically clean the head, and automatically unload when the cleaning cycle has completed (approximately 10 seconds). The condition of the head-cleaning cartridge is important to the process. Inspect the condition of the cleaning brush by opening the shutter of the cleaning cartridge. Check to see if the tip of the cleaning brush is open. If it is, use a newer head-cleaning cartridge.
Other Maintenance
1. Verify screws are securely in place on all PCB hold down tabs (PIM, CPU, ADAPTR, ACIM, DDEA, and IIM). 2. Verify all screws are securely in place on the Scanhead Select PCB. Tighten the screws in the correct sequence. Do not over tighten. Damaged screws or PEM nuts may require card cage replacement.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 169 Preventive Maintenance: Other Maintenance
3. For domestic U.S. field service, copy the diagnostic data to an optical disk, send the disk to ATL Technical Service (MS 440), and reset the error log. Write your name, FSE number, and the system serial number on the disk so it is returned to you. 4. Update the backup system files using UpLink and leave the disk accessible to the customer. 5. Check trackball operation for excessive drag or inconsistent cursor movement. Clean and adjust the tension or replace it with an adjustable style, see “Trackball” on page 170. 6. Verify all cooling fans are operational. 7. Run the Machine Comprehensive Test, verify system functionality. 8. Check resolution, penetration, and image quality. 9. Inspect the casters as follows: a. Inspect for signs of wear and replace if necessary. b. Replace caster hubcaps that are missing. c. Check that caster brakes are operational. If broken, order brake lever knob P/N 1065-2611-02. 10. Verify the OEM bay contains no OEMs that are hard-wired to the ACIM. 11. Re-attach loose rubber bumpers and touch up paint scratches. 12. Perform other cleaning and inspection procedures per Customer Service policy. 13. Fill out a quality assurance label. Attach it to the system per Customer Service policy. Cover the label with a label overlay: -
Label, P/N 4100-0940-01
-
Overlay, P/N 4100-0941-01
4730-0036-02
Trackball
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 170 Preventive Maintenance: Other Maintenance
➤ To clean and adjust the trackball tension: NOTE
This procedure applies only to trackballs having adjustable tension rings (P/N 2100-1656-01). Replace failed non-adjustable trackballs with the adjustable type.
1. Trackballs with removable seals can be cleaned without removing the assembly from the control panel. Remove the seal ring with the adjustment tool as shown in Figure 8-1, and lift the trackball out with tape or by tilting the control panel. 2. Vacuum and wipe clean the trackball and the assembly with a damp paper towel or rag. Using solvents or cleaners is not recommended. 3. Reassemble as shown in Figure 8-1. 4. Adjust trackball seal ring with adjustment tool (P/N 2100-1657-01) until its tension is satisfactory to the user and it operates smoothly. 5. If unable to adjust the tension so it operates smoothly, replace the assembly.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 171 Preventive Maintenance: Other Maintenance
1. Unscrew seal with tool P/N 2100-1657-01
4. Install and tighten seal for acceptable drag 2. Remove seal
3. Disassemble, clean and reassemble Figure 8-1
Cleaning the Trackball
4730-0036-02
9
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 172 Troubleshooting: Introduction
Troubleshooting
Introduction
The HDI 3500 Ultrasound System contains extensive software and hardware diagnostic capabilities. However, the system must boot up before the operator has access to diagnostics. This section contains information on the core bootup fault isolation procedure, system alerts, general fault isolation, and system diagnostics.
Core Bootup Fault Isolation
The HDI 3500 System requires the following PCBs for core bootup: ACIM, PSM, AIM, UIM, IIM, PIM, PCM, SYSCPU, DDEA, and CTRBRD. It also requires the control interface module cables, the video cable, and the monitor for core bootup. NOTE
Core bootup may take up to 25 minutes if there are malfunctioning PCBs or missing PCBs.
➤ The core bootup fault isolation procedure is as follows: 1. Set the ON/STANDBY switch to STANDBY and circuit breaker to off. Unplug the system power cord. CAUTION
Ensure the circuit breaker is set to off before removing PCBs. 2. Verify all card cage PCBs required for bootup (ACIM, PSM, AIM, CPANEL, IIM, PIM, PCM, SYSCPU, and DDEA) are securely seated into the CTRBRD. 3. Verify all cables to the IIM and ACIM are properly connected. 4. Set the circuit breaker and the ON/STANDBY switch to ON.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 173 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
5. If the system does not boot from the hard drive, insert the backup disk into the optical drive and attempt to boot the system from the optical drive. If the system does not bootup, continue with step 7. 6. If the system boots up from the optical drive, replace the hard drive. The hard drive should be loaded with 150.23 software or higher. 7. If the system does not boot from the hard drive, turn the circuit breaker to off, and remove the PSP1, PSP2, FEC, IMEM, SSP, ADAPTR, AIFOM, CB0-3 (all Channel Boards), SHSEL, and DOPACQ PCBs. Reboot the system. If the system boots up with the PCBs removed, one of the removed PCBs was preventing other PCBs from accessing a bus. Replace the PCBs individually until you determine the faulty PCB. NOTES • It will take several minutes (up to 25 minutes) for the system to boot without the PSP1, PSP2, FEC, IMEM, SSP, ADAPTR, AIFOM, CB0-3 (all Channel Boards), SHSEL, and DOPACQ PCBs. • With the FEC removed, the system will turn on, but not turn off. Use the circuit breaker to turn the system off. 8. Check the LEDs on each PCB. Refer to Figure 9-1, Figure 9-2, Table 9-1 and Table 9-2. NOTE
The system monitors the power supply enable voltages to ensure they are within tolerance. If the voltages are not within the tolerances listed in Figure 9-3, the system will shut down. If the system shuts down, none of the voltages will be enabled (all voltages will be 0V). If the system shuts down because of a power supply failure, check the PSM LEDs referring to Figure 9-1 and Table 9-2. Refer to Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4 for PCB voltage locations.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
PS1
PSM
PS2
PS3
A1F
A2F A3F A4F
Page 174 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6
A5F A6F A7F A8F A9F A10FA11FA12FA13FA14F
FEC
HVDC OK OVP TRIG
DS7 DS8
Figure 9-1
Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Front)
Reset switch
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
A8B IMEM
A4B PSP2
A3B PCM DSP ENET DS1 DSP DS2 MOP DS3
Page 175 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
SCIP MOP
WRITE DS1 READ DS2 IBUS DS3 ERROR
DS1
IIM Not shown (No LEDs)
HVDC to PSM
A12B AIFOM
Not Used
DS1 DS2
Power to HVDC HVDC output to card cage A12B AIFOM
A 1 B
A A A A 2 3 4 5 B B B B
A A A 6 7 8 B B B
A A A A A 9 10 11 12 13 B B B B B
A5B PSP1
SCIP MOP
ON
OFF
SCIP MOP
DS1 DS2
A11B SSP
SCSI
A6B CPU SCIP MOP PTX PTR
Figure 9-2
DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7
A2B PIM (LEDs not visible. Located behind PCB cover)
DS5 DS6
TRAP PAP SCIP MOP
DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4
A9B ADAPTR
Card Cage PCB LED Locations (Rear)
DAD SCIP MOP
DS3 DS2 DS1
4730-0036-02
Table 9-1
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 176 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
Normal Core Bootup and PCB LED Sequence
Core Bootup Sequence
Field Replaceable Unit - Visual Indication1
Main power switch off, ON/STANDBY switch off • AC power to ACIM Main power switch on, ON/STANDBY switch off • HVDC to PSM • Logic connection made to ON/ STANDBY switch Main power switch on, ON/STANDBY switch on (system power on) • Individual power supply voltages are turned on 2-3 seconds after Main Power switch or ON/STANDBY switch is turned on • PCBs get power and begin initializing • PIM generates test pattern • CPNL, UIM, IIM, PIM, PCM data path established • HD loads applications and operating system to CPU • CPU completes bootup • CPU/PCM establish client/server
ACIM - all LEDs off.
ACIM - LEDs #6 and #7 are lit continuously. #6 indicates power to HVDC transformer after internal fuse F1 (ACIM input). #7 indicates HVDC to PSM (ACIM output). Fans are off. CPNL - LEDs lit for 5 seconds, flash 4 times, then off PCM - DS2 flickers, 1 Hz after 5 seconds PIM - DS2 flickers, 1 Hz after 5 seconds CPU - SCIP quick flash, 1 Hz after 5 seconds SCIP flickers at 1 Hz, MOP flickers at 2 Hz PCM - DS1 on, all others pulse Monitor - color test pattern, blank screen, gray pattern Subsystem PCBs - refer to Table 9-2 for SCIP and MOP information Fans - full speed for 2 seconds, 3/4 speed until bootup, then 1/2 speed
4730-0036-02
Table 9-1
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 177 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
Normal Core Bootup and PCB LED Sequence (Continued)
Core Bootup Sequence
Field Replaceable Unit - Visual Indication1
System Initialization • CPU begins loading subsystem PCBs • CPU/PCM client/server operational • HD/DDEA completes loading applications and operating system • IDs and configuration are checked • System operational files loaded and scanheads initialized Core bootup complete • CPU using applications, SW, and MO files, checks configuration • CPU checks bootup error status • UIF enabled
CPU - SCIP flickers at 1 Hz, MOP flickers at 2 Hz PCM - top LED stays on, all others pulse Monitor - ATL logo, Splash Screen SHSEL - relays energize. System bootup time is approximately 1.5 minutes ACIM - LED #1 flickers at 1 Hz
Subsystem PCBs - refer to Table 9-2 Monitor - displays 2D image and static graphics (Static graphics displayed only if scanhead is connected to system during bootup) Fans - Fan speed depends on the card cage temperature averaged from 4 thermistors located on PCBs throughout the card cage. Correct fan voltage is sent from PSM to the fans (12 Vdc - +24 Vdc)
1. The sequence described is the normal sequence of events during core bootup. If these visual indications are not observed, refer to the Core Bootup Fault Isolation procedure.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-2 PCB
Page 178 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup Slot Location
Card Cage, Front PSM PS1 PS2 PS3 FEC A4F
LED Status DS1 - HVDC OK - Normally lit. Indicates that 155 Vdc is present to the PSM DS2 - OVP TRIG - When lit, indicates that +6 V or -6 V have higher than normal voltage, or -5.2 V current limiting has been activated (-5.2 V circuits are drawing more than 14.3 A). DS1 - not used DS2 - not used DS3 - MOP Fail - When lit, indicates MOP did not bootup DS4 - MOP LED1 DS5 - SCIP LED2 DS6 DS7 DS8 -
Card Cage, Rear PIM
A2B
DS1 - Control panel interface processor LED DS2 - SCIP / MOP LED2
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-2
PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup (Continued)
PCB
Slot Location
PCM
A3B
LED Status DS1 - Flickers when Ethernet communications with the CPU are active DS2 - DSP LED, flickers during image bus processing DS3 - MOP LED1 DS1 - During power up, is momentarily on while its program is loaded from PSP1. After bootup, is an activity indicator (glows according to how busy the PSP2 is.) During high frame rates/ color the LED should stay lit. Flickers when scan converting
PSP2
A4B
PSP1
A5B
DS1 - SCIP LED2
A6B
DS2 - MOP LED1 DS1 through DS3 - not used
CPU
Page 179 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
DS4 - SCIP LED2
IMEM
A8B
DS5 - MOP LED1 DS6 - PTX, flickers during Ethernet communications with CPU DS7 - PTR, flickers during Ethernet communications with CPU DS8 through DS11 - not used DS1 - Write LED, flickers during scanning DS2 - Read LED, flickers during scanning DS3 - IBUS ERROR LED, is normally off
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-2
Page 180 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup (Continued)
PCB
Slot Location
ADAPTR
A9B
LED Status DS1 - TRAP (Translation Processor) LED, flickers in all scanning modes. In 2D or Doppler the rate is so fast the LED appears constantly on. In Color the rate is visible DS2 - PAP (Physio-Audio Processor) LED, off in all modes DS3 - SCIP LED2 DS4 - MOP LED1
SSP
A11B
DS1 - MOP LED1 Will blink faster if the system is in M-mode, Doppler, or Color. If nothing is in flash EPROMs, the LED continues to blink at the bootup rate DS2 - SCIP LED2 When receiving messages the LED will flicker
AIFOM
A12B
DS3 - DAD LED Off after bootup. If in Doppler, the LED is on or off. If in Color, the LED blinks at an irregular rate, unless the system is in Freeze mode. If in M-mode, the LED blinks at a regular rate (DAD = Data Dispatcher processor) DS1 - not used DS2 - not used DS5 - SCIP LED2 DS6 - MOP LED1, Blinks at one-second intervals during system bootup and two-second intervals when loading flash code
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-2
Page 181 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
PCB LED Functions and Status after Core Bootup (Continued)
PCB
Slot Location
ACIM
PS5
LED Status DS1 - After system bootup, flashes at approximately 1 Hz. Indicates HVDC to PSM after system bootup DS2 - not used DS3 - not used DS4 - not used DS5 - not used DS6 - Normally lit (after system circuit breaker is set to on). Indicates power to HVDC after internal fuse F1 DS7 - Normally lit (after system circuit breaker is set to on). Indicates HVDC +155VDC from rectifier to PSM
1. The Module Operation Processor (MOP) controls PCB operation. The MOP LED blinks at one-second intervals during system bootup, and at a two-second rate after bootup. 2. The Serial Communications Interface Processor (SCIP) communicates between the PCB and the CPU. The SCIP LED blinks at one-second intervals after bootup.
4730-0036-02
P2
P3
Figure 9-3
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Test Points GND -15 V +15 V -12 V +12 V -6 V +6 V -5.2 V +5 V GND
GND -HV/10 +HV/10 FAN +3.3 V REF +5 V REF 2.5 V +5 V STBY +2.5 V STBY GND
Page 182 Troubleshooting: Core Bootup Fault Isolation
Tolerances
±0.45 Vdc ±0.36 Vdc ±0.12 Vdc ±0.104 Vdc ±0.10 Vdc
-HV X 0.0991 ±2% +HV X 0.0991 ±2% 0+0 +24 V Not currently used ±0.10 V When lit, indicates HVDC is present. ±0.05 V ±0.10 V When lit, indicates over voltage ±0.05 V protection is on or -5.2V current limiting has been activated.
HVDC OK OVP TRIG
PSM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS1, PS2, PS3)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 183 Troubleshooting: Alert Information
CAUTION
ACIM LED 6 indicates power to HVDC after internal fuse F1 (12A 25VDC FB)
Remove power to the system by disconnecting the power cord and waiting 15 seconds before removing or replacing power supply PCBs. Otherwise, damage to PCBs and the Motherboard will result.
ACIM LED 7 indicates HVDC +155VDC from rectifier to PSM
ACIM LED 1 indicates HVDC to PSM when the system has booted up ACIM LEDs 2 - 5 are not used ACIM
Figure 9-4
ACIM Voltage Measurement Locations (PS5)
Alert Information
Alerts indicate the system has detected a performance problem. These performance problems are caused by hardware faults or by system sensitivity to a particular series of keystrokes made by the operator. Alerts have a blue banner across the top of the dialog box.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 184 Troubleshooting: Alert Information
➤ To remove the alert from the display: 1. Simultaneously press Superkey and F6 (the sixth key to the right in the top row of oval-shaped keys on the lower user interface) to display a second page of error information (Figure 9-5). 2. Print or record the information on the second page. The second page of error information identifies the file and the line of software code containing the error. 3. Start troubleshooting with UpLink and Diagnostics. 4. Repeat step 1 to remove the alert message from the display and to continue scanning or other diagnostic procedures.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 185 Troubleshooting: User Event Log
Is 0.6 MI 1.0 r #234 14.2cm
Tests and Utilities Alert An error has been detected. Please record the following information and call ATL Technical Support. Feature-Diags.zErrStdENOENT (0104-20000002)
ERROR Subsystem Feature-Diags Errno: zErrStdENOENT (0104-20000002) Software Version: 4252-0815-12 124.11 File: VDiagsSoftware.c Line Number: 639 Priority: Alert-ErrorBanner Date: 08/20/1998 Time: 12:09:14 ErrnoInfo: No such file or directory UserInfo: Test of Priority Alert.
Figure 9-5
Alert with Second Page of Information Displayed
User Event Log
The user event log is helpful in determining the cause of system lockups by recording the sequence of user events (keystrokes or control activations) that resulted in the system lockup. The log records the last 500 keystrokes or control activations and the time they were entered from the system control panel. The event sequence is retained even if the system power switch and the circuit breaker are turned off. Any one of 10 pages of user
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 186 Troubleshooting: User Event Log
events are displayed with 50 events on each page (2 columns of 25). The user events may include keystrokes, slidepot changes, control knob rotations, or trackball movements. 1. Verify the system has booted up. 2. Simultaneously press and hold Superkey and Shift. Press the characters indicated in Table 9-3 to display the user event log for the desired language. Page 10 is displayed with the previous 50 events listed. Table 9-3
User Event Log Language Differences Keystrokes Required
Test
English
French
German
User Event Log
=
=
“spacebar”
3. Select Next on the bottom of the display to display the next page or Prev to display the previous page. The display appears similar to Figure 9-6. 4. Select Reset Log to clear all entries from the event log. 5. To exit, select Close on the bottom of the display. The display returns to the previous imaging mode.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 187 Troubleshooting: User Event Log
User Log 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98
11:47:35 12:07:44 12:07:44 12:07:51 12:07:51 12:07:58 12:08:06 12:08:58 12:09:14 12:09:45 12:17:20 12:17:23 12:17:29 12:17:58 12:18:01 12:18:13 12:18:14 12:19:30 12:19:40 12:19:41 12:19:58 12:19:58 12:19:59 12:19:59 12:20:03
Timeout PushBtn End Superkey Start PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn Button Button PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn End Start PowerUp
OK ConfirmDialog Diags Diags OK Tests, Utils. Execute Execute 3D 3D Hide Error Log Close Close Diags ProgressDialog
Start ModeChange Acquiring PushBtn End Superkey
ConfirmDialog 2d 2d OK ConfirmDialog Diags
--------------
Close
Figure 9-6
User Event Log
08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98 08/20/98
12:20:03 12:20:08 12:20:12 12:21:04 12:23:52 12:23:57 12:24:00 12:24:15 12:24:22 12:24:27 12:24:29 12:24:32 12:24:32 12:24:35 12:24:39 12:24:47 12:24:48 12:24:48 12:54:50 12:54:50 13:24:51 13:54:53 14:14:23 14:14:23 14:18:43
Reset Log
Start PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn End PushBtn Start PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn PushBtn Acquiring Timeout Timeout Timeout Button Acquiring Start
Prev
Diags OK Error Log Show User Sys. Return Close User Login OK Cancel Diags Close Menu UIF Close Close Menu Freeze
Freeze 2d UserLog
Next
10 of 10
4730-0036-02
Formatting Disks
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 188 Troubleshooting: Formatting Disks
➤ To format a blank optical disk: 1. Boot up the system. 2. Press NET/DISK. 3. Verify the blank optical disk is not write-protected (not write-protected = notch closed). 4. Insert the disk into the optical drive. 5. Select the Format Disk option displayed at the top left of the display. The optical drive LED will light during formatting. 6. Select the Eject Disk option to eject the formatted disk. 7. Press NET/DISK again or select Close at the bottom of the menu to return to the previous imaging mode.
Backing Up Presets
➤ To copy Tissue Specific Presets to the optical disk: 1. Boot up the system. 2. Press Setups on the keyboard. The Directory of Setup Options is displayed. 3. Verify the blank optical disk is not write-protected (not write-protected = notch closed). 4. Insert the disk into the optical drive. 5. Select Tissue Specific Presets (Figure 9-7). 6. Select Copy. The process of formatting and copying the presets to the optical disk takes several minutes. NOTE
If the disk needs formatting, display prompts will guide you through the format procedure. After formatting the disk, repeat step 6 and continue with the procedure.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 189 Troubleshooting: Backing Up Presets
7. To copy the presets from the optical disk to the hard drive, select Install.
Close
Figure 9-7
Setups Directory
Formatting Optical Disk/Copying Tissue Specific Presets
4730-0036-02
Core Dump Utilities
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 190 Troubleshooting: Core Dump Utilities
The core dump utilities are used to simultaneously store error data to the hard disk and the optical disk, or to the hard disk only. This procedure is similar to the Backup Diags Data procedure in “Backup Diags Data” on page 202. Service personnel will follow their local service policy prior to performing the procedure. ➤ To use the core dump utilities to backup data: 1. Verify the system clock is updating. (A sector or linear image is displayed.) 2. Verify the blank formatted optical disk is not write-protected (not write protected = notch closed). If your disk needs formatting, refer to “Formatting Disks” on page 188. 3. Insert the blank disk into the optical drive. 4. To write files first to the hard disk then copy them to the optical disk, refer to step a. To write files only to the hard disk, refer to step b. a. Simultaneously press Superkey, Shift, and Text C. This procedure will take approximately 5 minutes. The LED on the optical drive will be lit continuously as the drive is storing data to the disk. The optical disk will be automatically ejected once the data transfer has been completed. NOTE
When performing this task, the system clock stops and there is no dialog box or message displayed.
b. Simultaneously press Superkey, Shift, and Text D. This procedure will take approximately 3 minutes. The core files will be automatically transferred to an optical disk the next time the Backup Diags Data (“Backup Diags Data” on page 202) procedure is performed. 5. Label the disk with the following information: -
Service Order (S.O.) number
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
-
Machine ID number
-
Chassis ID number
-
Account name
-
Install date
-
FSE number or name
NOTE
Page 191 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
The disk will be replaced or returned for re-use.
6. Return the disk to ATL Bothell (TSG, mail stop 440) to the attention of TSG, or follow your local service policy. The information on the optical disk will be analyzed and the disk will be returned to you.
User Diagnostics
The user diagnostics enable the user to access several diagnostic capabilities. These capabilities enable the user to quickly diagnose system operational status or acquire the information needed to assist others in system diagnosis. ➤ To access the user diagnostics: 1. Press Setups on the keyboard. The Directory of Setup Options is displayed. 2. Select Diagnostics in the lower left corner of the display. The display appears as in Figure 9-8. 3. Move the cursor over an item and press SELECT to highlight your choice of tests to run from the list of Available Tests and Utilities. 4. Select Start to initiate the highlighted test. NOTES • The Comprehensive Test takes up to 20 minutes to run. The Check Installed Software utility takes over 10 minutes to run.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 192 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
• Refer to “Comprehensive Test” on page 193 to run the Comprehensive Test. Information on the other tests and options is listed in “Check Installed Software” on page 194 through “Video Test Patterns Utility” on page 204.
Diagnostics Available Tests and Utilities: Comprehensive Test Check Installed Software
Select a test or utility from the list. Press "Start" to start it. The results will be written below.
Show Bootup Status Report Show Machine Configuration Show Installed Options Backup Diags Data
Start/Stop
Video Test Patterns Utility Results:
Clear Save...
Search String:
Eject
Figure 9-8
Initialize Modem
User Diagnostics Menu
Find
Next Error Close
Setups Directory
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Comprehensive Test
Page 193 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
The Comprehensive Test is used to determine system operational status. The test comprises numerous sub-tests run sequentially in the opposite order of data flow, and tests approximately 90 percent of the card cage circuits. If a sub-test fails, the system completes the remaining sub-tests. When the Comprehensive Test has been completed, the results are displayed on the monitor with a message indicating pass or fail. If a sub-test fails, the comprehensive test fails and a failure code is displayed. There are over 10,000 possible error codes that log events, timing errors, logic faults, and failure data. The code is for engineering use only. It has no value to field personnel, but displayed errors and error logs can be useful when reported to ATL technical support. To capture diagnostic data for analysis, follow “To use the core dump utilities to backup data:” on page 190 and follow the directions of your ATL technical support person. Run the Comprehensive Test any time a system error is displayed or when the user suspects problems with the system. If an error message is displayed during the test, note the error and reboot the system with the ON/STANDBY switch. The test takes from 15 to 20 minutes to run, depending on which software version is installed in the system. Also, the Comprehensive Test results are most reliable when run right after the system boots up. ➤ To invoke the Comprehensive Test: 1. Verify there are no scanheads connected. 2. Under the Directory of Setup Options, select Diagnostics. The display appears as in Figure 9-8. 3. Highlight Comprehensive Test. 4. Move the cursor to the START button. Press SELECT. A windowed message is displayed stating, “This test will take more than fifteen (15) minutes.”
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 194 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
5. Move the cursor to the Continue button. Press SELECT. The results window displays dots as an indication of the status of the test. If a failure occurs, an error code is displayed. 6. To exit the Diagnostics Menu, select Close. The following note is displayed: NOTE
System parameters have changed. It is necessary to reboot the machine before further scanning can be done.
7. Use the trackball to select the Reboot option. Press SELECT to reboot the system.
Check Installed Software
This test comprises Cyclic Redundancy Checks (also known as CRCs) of all read-only system software files. If a CRC fails, it may indicate a disk drive problem or a corrupted file. Reinstall the system software and check the DDEA PCB. 1. Under the Directory of Setup Options, select Diagnostics. The display appears as in Figure 9-8. 2. Move the cursor to Check Installed Software. 3. Press SELECT to highlight the option. 4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT. A message is displayed stating “Please wait, this process will take approximately 2 minutes.” 5. Use the trackball to select OK. Press SELECT. The Start button changes to a Stop button. When the test is complete, the results are displayed in the results window, and the Stop button turns into the Start button again. The results are displayed as Completed: PASS (or FAIL). 6. Select Stop to abort the test if needed.
Show Bootup Status Report
During system bootup, the CPU queries the individual PCBs and displays the bootup status on the monitor.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 195 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
1. Under the Directory of Setup Options, select Diagnostics. The display appears as in Figure 9-8. 2. Move the cursor to Show Bootup Status Report. 3. Press SELECT to highlight the option. 4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT to initiate the option. The system instantaneously displays a note stating the “Bootup status reported NO errors.” Test results are displayed as Completed: PASS (or FAIL).
Show Machine Configuration
The Show Machine Configuration option displays the machine ID number, hard disk part number, and software version (software build) number. The machine ID number is a unique number assigned to each system and is programmed into a chip on the SYSCPU PCB. All machine options to be installed onto a particular system must contain the correct machine ID number for that particular system or no options will be enabled. 1. Under the Directory of Setup Options, select Diagnostics. The display appears as in Figure 9-8. 2. Move the cursor to Show Machine Configuration. 3. Press SELECT to highlight the option. 4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT to initiate the option. The results are displayed as: Machine ID: 0000005fXXXX Hard-Disk Software: 4252-0XXX-XX 1XX.XX (“X” indicates a numerical placeholder).
Show Installed Options
The Show Installed Options selection displays the system options installed on a particular system, whether those options were purchased when the system was ordered or for an upgrade. Refer to the COA (Customer Order Acknowledgement) for the customer
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 196 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
ordered features, and check the installed options list for the options configured for the system. If there is a discrepancy, order a Machine Options Configuration disk for that particular system. Re-install the files from the new machine options disk onto the hard drive and check the configuration again. 1. Under the Directory of Setup Options, select Diagnostics. The display appears as in Figure 9-8. 2. Move the cursor to Show Installed Options. 3. Press SELECT to highlight the option. 4. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT to initiate the option. 5. Refer to Table 9-4 for a list of the machine options possible with each released software version. Machine options will be added as the system matures through the product life cycle. NOTE Table 9-4
If there are no machine options listed for a particular software version, that software version is not listed in the following table.
Machine Options/Software Build Compatibility Matrix
Part Number Description 1 2 3
150.23 151.09
Software Versions
8501-8507-01 Extended Doppler Capability l l 8501-8507-02 Extended Doppler Capability l l EMI 8501-8523-01 English Language/UIF ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-4
Page 197 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
Machine Options/Software Build Compatibility Matrix (Continued)
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Part Number Description
150.23 151.09
Software Versions
8501-8524-01 8501-8525-01 8501-8523-02 8501-8524-02 8501-8525-02 8501-9622-01 8501-9058-01 8501-9060-01 8501-9062-01 8501-9064-01 8501-8533-01 8501-8534-01 8501-8536-01 8501-8536-02
ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll
German Language/UIF French Language/UIF English Language German Language French Language Italian Language Danish Language Norwegian Language Swedish Language Finnish Language Voltage/Video 120 NTSC Voltage/Video 230 NTSC Voltage/Video 230 PAL Voltage/Video 230 PAL IEC-601-1 18 8501-8665-01 NTSC Video 19 8501-8666-01 PAL Video 20 8501-8563-01 Capability, L7-4 38 mm
ll ll ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-4
Page 198 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
Machine Options/Software Build Compatibility Matrix (Continued)
Part Number Description
150.23 151.09
Software Versions
21 22 23 24 25 26 27
8501-8565-01 8501-8567-01 8501-8574-01 8501-8576-01 8501-8579-01 8501-8585-01 8501-8586-01
ll ll ll ll ll ll
28 29 30 31
8501-8587-01 8501-8589-01 8501-8595-01 8501-8596-01
32 33 34 35 36
8501-8597-01 8501-8598-01 8501-8600-01 8501-8601-01 8501-8604-01
Capability, L10-5 38 mm Capability, C4-2 40R Capability, CIVT5 Capability, P3-2 20 mm Capability, P5-3 16 mm Clin. Opt., Vasc: TCD Clin. Opt., Vasc: Cerebro Vasc Clin. Opt., Vasc: Peripheral Clin. Opt., Vasc: Introp Clin. Opt., Genim: Abdomen Clin. Opt., Genim: Small Parts Clin. Opt., Genim: Prostate Clin. Opt., Genim: Pediatric Clin. Opt., OB Clin. Opt., Gyn/Fert Capability, D5 CW
ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-4
Page 199 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
Machine Options/Software Build Compatibility Matrix (Continued)
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
Part Number Description
150.23 151.09
Software Versions
8501-8606-01 8501-8607-01 8501-8612-01 8501-8621-01 8501-8622-01 8501-8625-01 8501-8626-01 8501-8652-01 8501-8653-01 8501-8654-01 8501-8655-01
ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll
48 8501-8656-01 49 50 51 52
8501-8657-01 8501-8668-01 8501-8683-01 8501-8687-01
Capability, D10 CW Capability, D2 TC Capability, C3.5 76R Capability, C7-4 40R Capability, C9-5 ICT Capability, CL10-5 26 mm Capability, P7-4 11 mm Color Power Angio Capability, MPT7-4 Clin. Opt., Card: Adult Clin. Opt., Card: Ped/Fetal Echo Clin. Opt., Card: Transesophag. Capability, CW2 DiskLink NetLink Steered CW
ll ll ll ll ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-4
Page 200 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
Machine Options/Software Build Compatibility Matrix (Continued)
Part Number Description
150.23 151.09
Software Versions
53 54 55 56
8501-8688-01 8501-8689-01 8501-8694-01 8501-8695-01
ll ll ll ll
57 58 59 60 61 62 63
8501-8696-01 8501-8697-01 8501-8698-01 8501-8699-01 8501-9100-01 8501-9102-01 8501-9103-01
64 8501-9104-01 65 8501-9108-01 66 8501-9109-01
Color M-Mode Frame Grab Triple Mode 3D Color Power Angio Imaging Capability, C8-5 Capability, CT8-4 Capability, LI9-5 Capability, L12-5 38 mm Capability, C8-4v Clin. Opt., Neurosurgical Clin. Opt., Abdominal Surgery Clin. Opt., Card: Musculoskeletal Clin. Opt., Card: CSI TSI Patient Optimization
ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll ll
Notes
4730-0036-02
Table 9-4
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 201 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
Machine Options/Software Build Compatibility Matrix (Continued)
Part Number Description
150.23 151.09
Software Versions
67 8501-9127-01 Clin. Opt., Harmonic Research 68 8501-9134-01 Capability, BPT9-5 69 8501-9155-01 WebLink 70 8501-9165-01 Clin. Opt., Card: THI 71 8501-9166-01 ResearchLink
ll
72 8501-9167-01 Service Access Diagnostics 73 8501-9169-01 Clin. Opt., Adv. Breast Imaging 74 8501-9266-01 Capability, LAP L9-5 75 8501-9169-01 Clin. Opt., Adv. Breast Imaging 76 8501-9339-01 Capability, P4-2 20 mm 77 8501-9342-01 Capability, L12-5 50 mm 78 8501-9397-01 Auto Scaling 79 8501-9398-01 Dicom Scaling 80 8501-9424-01 Capability, C5-2 40R 81 8501-9450-01 Clin. Opt., Rad. CSI
ll ll
ll ll ll ll
ll ll ll ll l l ll ll
Notes
1
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-4
Page 202 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
Machine Options/Software Build Compatibility Matrix (Continued)
Part Number Description 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
8501-9451-01 8501-9601-01 8501-9602-01 8501-9603-01 8501-9617-01 8501-9618-01 8501-9654-01
Clin. Opt., Vasc. CSI 3D Grayscale Clin. Opt., OB THI Clin. Opt., Abdominal THI Tissue Harmonic Imaging Clin. Opt., Gyn/Fert/THI Enhanced Memory
8501-9986-01 Capability, C8-5, ATL
150.23 151.09
Software Versions
Notes
ll ll ll ll ll ll ll l
1. For research purposes only. Not a purchasable feature.
Backup Diags Data
This option is useful for diagnosing difficult and intermittent problems. It saves the error log, the results of the last Comprehensive Test, the user event log, and other diagnostic information to a blank formatted optical disk for later analysis. Service personnel should contact their respective ATL technical support for directions on managing and transfer of the backup data prior to performing this procedure. Refer to “Core Dump Utilities” on page 190 for a similar procedure, which allows you to store data on the optical or hard drives, or both.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 203 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
➤ To backup the diagnostic data to an optical disk: 1. Under the Directory of Setup Options, select Diagnostics. The display appears as in Figure 9-8. 2. Move the cursor to Backup Diags Data. Press SELECT. The Backup Diags Data option is highlighted. 3. Verify the blank formatted optical disk is not write-protected (not write-protected = notch closed). 4. Insert the blank disk into the optical drive. Refer to “Formatting Disks” on page 188 for the formatting procedure. 5. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT. The results are displayed as Completed: PASS. The process takes approximately 20 seconds to complete. NOTE
If a disk has not been inserted in the drive, a dialog box is displayed. The LED on the optical drive is lit and the Start button changes to Stop while data is being transferred, however, the Stop function has not been implemented.
6. Move the cursor to Eject in the lower left of the display. Press SELECT to remove the disk from the drive. 7. Label the disk with the following information: -
Service Order (S.O.) number
-
Machine ID number
-
Chassis ID number
-
Account name
-
Install date
-
FSE number or name
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 204 Troubleshooting: User Diagnostics
8. Return the disk to ATL Bothell (TSG, mail stop 440) or follow your local service policy. The information on the optical disk will be analyzed and the disk will be returned to you.
Video Test Patterns Utility
The Video Test Pattern Utility is used to isolate monitor, printer, and VCR video problems. 1. Under the Directory of Setup Options, select Diagnostics. The display appears as in Figure 9-8. 2. Move the cursor to Video Test Patterns Utility. The option is highlighted. 3. Move the cursor to Start. Press SELECT. A note is displayed stating: “The test patterns will be displayed one at a time. Press the spacebar to view the next pattern, 1 through 0 to view a specific pattern, or any other key to quit.” 4. Move the cursor to OK. Press SELECT. A grayshade test pattern is displayed. 5. Use the spacebar to move through the individual test patterns, or refer to the test pattern numbers in Table 9-5, and press the appropriate number to obtain the desired test pattern. Table 9-5
Video Test Patterns
Test Pattern Number Description 1 2 3
Sixteen grayshade bars displayed vertically. White bars on left, black on right Eight color bars displayed vertically. White, yellow, light blue, green, purple, red, dark blue, and black Cross hatch pattern. Black background, with white grid
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 9-5
Page 205 Troubleshooting: Remote Diagnostics
Video Test Patterns (Continued)
Test Pattern Number Description 4
Entire screen displays the letter “y” in every character position. White letters on a black background
5
Quartered display with circle in the center of the display. Black background with white pattern Quartered display with circle in the center of the display. White background with black pattern White rectangle on black background White screen Flat black screen Flat black screen with grid of white dots
6 7 8 9 0
Remote Diagnostics
The HDI 3500 has a full suite of diagnostic capabilities that can be run by means of a telephone modem connection. Contact your ATL technical support for more information.
4730-0036-02
10
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 206 Disassembly: Card Cage PCBs and Modules
Disassembly
WARNING
Always turn power off, disconnect the main power cord from the wall outlet, and wait at least 30 seconds before removing or installing any PCB, module, or component.
CAUTIONS
•
Always use correct ESD procedures. ESD damage is cumulative and may not be noticeable at first. ESD symptoms may be first exhibited as a slight degradation of performance or image quality.
•
Do not pull and reinsert PCBs or other modules while main circuit breaker is ON. To reset PCBs, use the reset button provided on the card edge of many modules.
Card Cage PCBs and Modules
General procedure 1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord. 2. Remove covers as necessary to gain access to the part requiring replacement. 3. Loosen captive screws on those boards with shields, or loosen the retaining clips as necessary.
CAUTION
Several modules require that adjacent modules be removed in order to provide ease of removal or allow correct alignment. For example, remove the PIM, PCM, PSP1, and PSP2 to correctly align the IIM module by hand to prevent misalignment of the PCB to the centerplane.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 207 Disassembly: Monitor
➤ To remove the IIM: 1. Remove the right side panel in addition to the rear panel. 2. Remove all cable connectors from both the IIM and PIM. 3. Remove modules immediately to the right to gain clearance (to slot A3B). 4. Remove the IIM. ➤ To insert the IIM: 1. Remove both modules immediately to the right (to slot A3B). 2. Use your right hand to align the IIM with the card guides and to ensure the connectors mate correctly with the centerplane. CAUTION
Use caution when inserting the IIM into the centerplane. If connector pins are bent during insertion of the IIM, damage to the IIM or centerplane may result. 3. Replace the PIM and PCM. 4. Tighten all fasteners to ensure proper EMI/RFI shielding.
Monitor
NOTE
Always place the monitor on its back to prevent damage to the locking tabs when the monitor is not installed on the system. (Four plastic feet are on the back of the monitor.)
➤ To install the monitor: 1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord. 2. Place the monitor on the system with the tabs inserted into the latching assemblies. 3. Slide the retaining levers forward to engage the locking tabs.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual Page 208 Disassembly: Control Panel PCBs, Trackball, and ON/STANDBY Switch
4. Rotate the retaining levers out and up to secure the monitor. Use a tool inserted into the center hole of the lever if necessary. 5. Connect the video/audio (monitor signal) cable and engage the slide lock. 6. Connect the power cord to the monitor and rotate the cable lock to secure the connector to the monitor. ➤ To remove the monitor: 1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord. 2. Remove the VCR. 3. Release the cable lock on the power cord connector on the lower rear of the monitor by rotating it to the rear of the system. 4. Disconnect the power cord from the monitor. 5. Slide the locking plate on the video/audio (monitor signal) cable to the left. 6. Disconnect the video/audio cable connector from the monitor. 7. Rotate down and slide to the rear the retaining levers under each side of the monitor to release the monitor tabs. Use a tool inserted into the center hole of the lever if necessary. 8. Lift the monitor up and off of the system.
Control Panel PCBs, Trackball, and ON/STANDBY Switch
➤ To remove the Control Panel PCBs, trackball, or ON/STANDBY switch: (Figure 10-1): 1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord. 2. Use a small common screwdriver to push in the locking bar latch release on the left rear of the upper user-interface assembly (step 1 in Figure 10-1). 3. Slide the lock bar to the right and remove it (step 2).
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual Page 209 Disassembly: Control Panel PCBs, Trackball, and ON/STANDBY Switch
4. Lift the top edge of the upper user-interface assembly and remove the assembly to gain access to the UIM or the lower user-interface assembly and trackball (step 3). 5. Disconnect and remove components as necessary.
1
Push in with common screwdriver 2
3
Lift and remove
Figure 10-1
Control Panel Details
Slide, then remove
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Internal OEMs
Page 210 Disassembly: Internal OEMs
➤ To install an Internal OEM: (Figure 10-3) 1. Lay two straps on a flat surface; place OEM device upside down on the straps. 2. Place OEM tray upside down on the OEM. -
Center the OEM between the sides of the tray with the captive screw to the rear of the OEM (see detail in Figure 10-2).
-
The front of the tray should slightly overhang the OEM.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 211 Disassembly: Internal OEMs
- REAR Screws MIC
OEM tray
5600 890
Tabs
- FRONT Figure 10-2
OEM Orientation on OEM Tray 3. Pass the straps through the first slots outside of the OEM with the ring, velcro and buckle, as shown in Figure 10-3. 4. Adjust the buckle as tight as possible. Then loosen the velcro, pull on both ends of the strap until snug, and reattach the velcro. Repeat for the second strap. 5. Secure tray in OEM bay with tabs in slots.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual Page 212 Disassembly: Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation
Velcro tail Buckle
Ring
Universal OEM plate Strap OEM
See Figure 14-8 Figure 10-3
Internal OEM Installation
Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation
➤ To remove the Scanhead Select Module: 1. Turn off the system circuit breaker and disconnect power cord. 2. Disconnect scanheads from the system. 3. Remove the system front cover.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual Page 213 Disassembly: Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation
4. Starting with screw number 14, loosen the screws in the reverse sequence shown in Figure 10-4. 5. Remove the Scanhead Select Module. 6. Visually inspect the module. ➤ To install the Scanhead Select Module: 1. Align the Scanhead Select Module over the Channel boards and flush against the system. Ensure the module connects with the Channel board connectors and is level and square on the front of the system. 2. Hand tighten the screws in the order shown in Figure 10-4. 3. Replace missing or damaged screws with part number 1563-0258-01. CAUTION
Overtightening the screws may damage the Scanhead Select Module gasket and/or metal shield, requiring replacement of the module. 4. Use a 7/64 Allen wrench to tighten the screws in the order shown. The base of the screw heads should be flush with the Scanhead Select Module. 5. Connect the system power cord and turn on the system. 6. Reconnect scanheads and verify system operation. 7. Install the system front cover.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual Page 214 Disassembly: Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation
CAUTION
12
5
CAUTION: Carefully align the S/HSEL Module over the Channel Boards. Do not damage the RF gasket.
14
9
7
13
11
1
2 4
3
1. Hand tighten screws (P/N 1563-0258-01) in the order shown. 2. Use a wrench to tighten the screws an additional 1/4 turn in the order shown.
8
Figure 10-4
6
10
S/HSEL Installation Details
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual Page 215 Disassembly: Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation
Screw (4 plcs)
Metal jaws
See Figure 14-36 Figure 10-5
Monitor Cable Clamp Installation (Control Module)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual Page 216 Disassembly: Scanhead Select Module Removal and Installation
RFI gasket
Backing plate Cable stripped Bracket Nuts (or screws)
See Figure 14-3 Figure 10-6
Monitor RFI Cable Clamp Installation (Right Side Panel)
4730-0036-02
11
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 218 Cabling: Introduction
Cabling
Introduction
This section contains system card edge, cabling, and connector information. To aid in navigating, figures have references to tables and table items to appropriate figures. Illustrations of the signal cables are grouped by system component or peripheral device. Use the following rules to navigate through cabling: •
When using electronic copies of this manual: -
Locate cables using the system cabling diagrams in Figure 11-39 through Figure 11-42. Part numbers on these diagrams are electronically linked to their descriptions in Table 11-34 and Table 11-35.
-
Locate cables using the alphabetized descriptions in Table 11-34 and Table 11-35. Together these tables list all the cables and have references to Section 14, “Parts”, and to cable illustrations.
-
Find the physical location of cables in system illustrations of Section 14, “Parts”, by using cross-references in the cable illustrations, or in Table 11-34 and Table 11-35.
NOTE
•
Select the cross-reference in the first header of each table. Electronic cross-references in table headers that are continued (same header - next page), will not respond when selected.
When using printed copies of this manual: -
Locate cables using the alphabetized descriptions in Table 11-34 and Table 11-35. Use figure references on the table to find illustrations and pinout tables.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
-
System Cabling and Connectors
Page 219 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Locate cable part numbers using the system diagrams in Figure 11-39 through Figure 11-42.
Figure 11-1 through Figure 11-4 are illustrations of the system primary connector assemblies. Figure 11-5 shows the numbering pattern of the centerplane and PCB connectors. Also shown is the general layout of PCBs, the general locations of test points, LEDs, and reset and interrupt switches. Figure 11-6 through Figure 11-38 are illustrations of system and OEM (internal and external) signal and power cables. Pinout information for these cables are provided in Table 11-1 through Table 11-33.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 220 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Scanhead connectors Optical disk drive
ECG
High-level ECG (from ECG monitors)
Static probe connector
Pulse (Aux. Ch A) Phono (Aux. Ch B) Footswitch
See Figure 14-14 for Card Cage Figure 11-1
DDEA DDEA/A1F
Connector Locations, Front Panel
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
CONTROL PANEL MONITOR
VCR
HARDCOPY
Int. cable to user interface
Page 221 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
! NI-RGB
Int. monitor non-interlaced RGB (IRGB in VCR playback) Int. VCR S-VHS video
Int. hardcopy interlaced RGB OSP. and monochrome video out
I-RGB out/in
S-VID CVID B&W VID
Ext. monitor non-interlaced RGB (IRGB in VCR playback) Ext. hardcopy interlaced RGB Ext. S-VHS VCR video Ext. composite video out/in Ext. monochrome video out DVS port
SCIP E-NET
See Figure 14-21 for Card Cage Figure 11-2
Int. Interface Module IIM/A1B
Peripheral Interface Module PIM/A2B
Connector Locations, Rear Panel (1 of 2)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 222 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
! Ext. serial printer 10101 Serial
E-Net
See Figure 14-21 for Card Cage
Figure 11-3
9-pin serial connector for laptop (P4) Ethernet
System CPU CPU/A6B
L R
Ext. VCR audio out
L R
Ext. VCR audio in
Adapter PCB ADAPTR/A9B
Connector Locations, Rear Panel (2 of 2)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 223 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
P506 24 VDC to System Fans
P508
Secondary of Secondary Transformer
P505 Power Out to Monitor
P507
Primary of Secondary Transformer
P504 Power Out to OEM P503 Power Out to OEM P502 Main Transformer Primary P501 Main Transformer Secondary
Figure 11-4
AC Input Module (ACIM) Connector Locations
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
D
C
B
E
A
Page 224 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Centerplane Test points A B C
D
Reset SW
E
NMI SW
Stiffener
1
DSP LED SCIP LED MOP LED
95
Pin-plug on centerplane
Phone jack
Receptacle Bar code and part number label area on solder side
Figure 11-5
PCB component side (To left when facing card cage)
Centerplane Connector and Card Edge Features
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Signal Cables
Page 225 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
System and OEM (internal and external) signal cables are illustrated in Figure 11-6 through Figure 11-33. Pinout information for these cables are provided in Table 11-1 through Table 11-27.
2275-0267-XX
Molded strain relief
RCA male 3 black
RCA male 1 black Connect one end of cable to ADAPTR PCB Ext. VCR Audio (In and Out) and the other end of the cable to Ext. SVHS VCR Audio (Out and In)
RCA male 2 red
See Table 11-1
RCA male 4 red
Both ends of cable are cabled the same. Use either end for either device.
Figure 11-6
RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX)
Table 11-1
RCA-RCA, Stereo Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0267-XX)
From ADAPTR PCB Audio In/Out
To External VCR Audio Out/In
Function
MALE 1 TIP MALE 1 RING MALE 2 TIP MALE 2 RING
MALE 3 TIP MALE 3 RING MALE 4 TIP MALE 4 RING
R-AUDIO R-AUDIO GND L-AUDIO L-AUDIO GND
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 226 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
2275-0326-XX To OEM Video In
From PIM PCB NI- RGB
Red P2
Pin 1 P1
Grn P3 Blu P4 Sync P5
Pin 9
See Table 11-2 Figure 11-7
OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-2
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 227 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
OEM Cable Assembly, NI-RGB External (P/N 2275-0326-XX)
From PIM PCB
To OEM Video In Connectors
Function
P1-1 P1-6 P1-2 P1-7 P1-3 P1-8 P1-4 P1-9
P2 CENTER P2 SHIELD P3 CENTER P3 SHIELD P4 CENTER P4 SHIELD P5 CENTER P5 SHIELD
RED SIGNAL RED_RETURN GREEN SIGNAL GREEN_RETURN BLUE SIGNAL BLUE_RETURN SYNC SIGNAL SYNC_RETURN
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 228 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
2275-0335-XX Printer
Category 5 cable
P1
Pin 1
Pin 8
Ethernet Wall Connector
J1
See Table 11-3
Figure 11-8
Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX)
Table 11-3
Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX)
From Printer
To Ethernet Connector
Signal Function
P1-1 P1-2 P1-3 P1-4
J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 J1-4
To be added.
4730-0036-02
Table 11-3
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 229 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Codonics NP1660 Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0335-XX)
From Printer
To Ethernet Connector
P1-5
J1-5
P1-6 P1-7 P1-8
J1-6 J1-7 J1-8
Signal Function
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 230 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
2275-0337-XX
P4 From CPU PCB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NC
NC
9 3 2 6 5 4 8 7 1
P1 To laptop computer
P4 is the second connector from the top of the CPU PCB (9-pin Dsub, male). Either end of the cable may be used on the HDI 5000 or the laptop connectors. The only wires needed for communication between the HDI 5000 and a laptop computer are the TX, RX, and GND wires.
See Table 11-4 Figure 11-9
Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-4
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 231 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Serial Data Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0337-XX)
From CPU
To Laptop
Signal Function (P4 on CPU)
P4-1 to P4-6 P4-2 P4-3 P4-4 P4-5 P4-6 P4-7 P4-8 P4-9 -
P1-3 P1-2 P1-6 to P1-1 P1-5 P1-4 P1-8 P1-7
CD RX TX DTR GND DSRn RTS CTS NO CONNECTION NO CONNECTION
P1-9
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 232 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
2275-0327-XX From IIM PCB HARDCOPY
To AAM Video In
Pin 1
Pin 1
P1
P2
Pin 37
Figure 11-10
See Table 11-5
Pin 9
AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input (P/N 2275-0327-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-5
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 233 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
AAM Video Signal Cable Assembly, Internal Input (P/N 2275-0327-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY)
To AAM (Video In)
Function
P1-1 P1-20 P1-2 P1-21 P1-3 P1-22 P1-4 P1-23
P2-5 P2-4 P2-3 P2-4 P2-1 P2-2 P2-6 P2-2
RED SIGNAL RED_RETURN GREEN SIGNAL GREEN_RETURN BLUE SIGNAL BLUE_RETURN SYNC SIGNAL SYNC_RETURN
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 234 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
2275-0395-XX From IIM PCB HARDCOPY
To AAM Video In
Pin 1
Pin 1
P1
P2
Pin 37
See Table 11-6
Pin 9
Figure 11-11
AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX)
Table 11-6
AAM Cable Assembly, Internal Output (P/N 2275-0395-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY)
To AAM (Video In)
Function
P1-9 P1-10 P1-15 P1-5
P2-3 P2-8 P2-4 P2-9
Y-SIGNAL Y-RETURN C-SIGNAL C-RETURN
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 235 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
2275-0394-XX From PIM PCB IRGB
To AAM Video In
Pin 1
Pin 1
P1
Pin 15
Figure 11-12
P2
See Table 11-7
Pin 9
AAM Video Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-7
Page 236 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
AAM Cable Assembly, External Input (P/N 2275-0394-XX)
From PIM (IRGB)
To AAM (Video In)
Function
P1-1 P1-9 P1-2 P1-10 P1-3 P1-11 P1-4 P1-12
P2-5 P2-4 P2-3 P2-4 P2-1 P2-2 P2-6 P2-2
RED SIGNAL RED RETURN GREEN SIGNAL GREEN RETURN BLUE SIGNAL BLUE RETURN SYNC SIGNAL SYNC RETURN
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 237 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
2275-0396-XX From PIM PCB IRGB
To AAM Video In
Pin 1
Pin 1
P1
P2
Pin 15
See Table 11-8
Pin 9
Figure 11-13
AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX)
Table 11-8
AAM Cable Assembly, External Output (P/N 2275-0396-XX)
From PIM (IRGB)
To AAM (Video In)
Function
P1-9 P1-10 P1-15 P1-5
P2-3 P2-8 P2-4 P2-9
Y-SIGNAL Y-RETURN C-SIGNAL C-RETURN
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
3500-1404-XX
Page 238 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
See Table 11-9
Pin 25
To VCR
P2
From IIM PCB VCR Pin 25 P1
Pin 1 P6 P8 P7 P4 Pin 1
Coaxial conductors (4X)
Figure 11-14
Shielded signal conductors (5X)
P3
VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-9
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 239 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
VCR Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1404-XX)
From IIM (VCR)
To VCR
Function
P1-1 P1-14 P1-2 P1-15 P1-9 P1-10 P1-12 P1-11 P1-3 P1-16 P1-4 P1-17 P1-5 P1-18 P1-6 P1-19 P1-7 P1-20 P1-8 P1-21
P3-3 P3-1 (Shield) P3-4 P3-2 (Shield) P2-2 P2-3 P2-7 P2-Shell P4-3 P4-1 (Shield) P4-4 P4-2 (Shield) P7-Center P7-Shield P8-Center P8-Shield P6-Center P6-Shield P5-Center P5-Shield
VCR_IN_Y VCR_IN_Y return VCR_IN_C VCR_IN_C return TX RX Return Shield VCR_OUT_Y VCR_OUT_Y return VCR_OUT_C VCR_OUT_C return IN_L IN_L_RET IN_R IN_R_RET OUT_L OUT_L_RET OUT_R OUT_R_RET
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 240 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2642-XX
From PIM PCB S-VID Pin 9 P1
To VCR S-VIDEO input J1
J2 To VCR S-VIDEO output
Pin 1
See Table 11-10
Figure 11-15
VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-10
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 241 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
VCR Cable Assembly, External, SVHS (P/N 3500-2642-XX)
From PIM SVID
To J1/J2
Function
P1-1 P1-5 P1-2 P1-6 P1-3 P1-7 P1-4 P1-8
J1-3 J1-1 J1-4 J1-2 J2-3 J2-1 J2-4 J2-2
PIM_LUMA_EXTVCR PIM_LUMA_EXTVCR_RETURN PIM_CHROMA_EXTVCR PIM_CHROMA_EXTVCR_RETURN EXTVCR_LUMA_PIM EXTVCR_LUMA_PIM_RETURN EXTVCR_CHROMA_PIM EXTVCR_CHROMA_PIM_RETURN
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 242 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors S1 DDEA PCB
3500-1483-XX
S3 To hard disk drive S2 To optical disk drive
See Table 11-11 All wires have corresponding pins on both plugs.
Figure 11-16
Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-11
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 243 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Disk Drive Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1483-XX)
From DDEA
To Optical Drive
To Hard Drive
S1-1 S1-2 S1-3 S1-X S1-49 S1-50
S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-X S2-49 S2-50
S3-1 S3-2 S3-3 S3-X S3-49 S3-50
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 244 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-1539-XX Coax
P2 P1
Shielded Cable
To MIC (All Versions) From IIM Hardcopy
Figure 11-17
See Table 11-12
Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-12
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 245 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Aspect MIC Signal Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1539-XX)
From IIM
To Aspect MIC
Function
P1-6 P1-25 P1-8 P1-12 P1-28 P1-29
P2-13 P2-23 P2-25 P2-12 P2-10 P2-22
VIDEO (coax) VIDEO RETURN (coax shield) PRINT (shielded cable) READY (shielded cable) RETURN (shielded cable) SHIELD (shielded cable)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 246 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-1540-XX From IIM PCB HARDCOPY P1
Pin 1 To B/W video printer J1 J2
Pin 37 See Table 11-13 Figure 11-18
B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-13
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 247 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
B/W Printer Cable Assembly, Internal (P/N 3500-1540-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY)
To B/W Video Printer
Function
P1-6 P1-25 P1-8 P1-13 P1-27 P1-28
J1 Center J1 Shield J2 Tip J2 Ring J2 Housing J2 Shell
VIDEO VIDEO_RETURN PRINT READY RETURN (Drain wire)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 248 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-1541-XX To RGB printer
From IIM PCB HARDCOPY P1
J1 Red
Pin 1
J2 Grn J3 Blu J4 Sync J5 On-screen programming J6 Printer control
Pin 37 See Table 11-14 Figure 11-19
Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-14
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 249 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Color Printer Cable Assembly, Internal RGB (P/N 3500-1541-XX)
From IIM (HARDCOPY)
To RGB Printer
Function
P1-1 P1-20 P1-2 P1-21 P1-3 P1-22 P1-4 P1-23 P1-5 P1-24 P1-8 P1-12 P1-27 P1-28
J1 Center J1 Shield J2 Center J2 Shield J3 Center J3 Shield J4 Center J4 Shield J5 Center J5 Shield J6 Tip J6 Ring J6 Housing Shield (Drain)
RED (R) RED_RETURN GRN (G) GRN_RETURN BLU (B) BLUE_RETURN SNC (Sync) SNC_RETURN OSP (VIDEO OUT) OSP_RETURN (VIDEO OUT RETURN) (Shield connected to housing at J6)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 250 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2644-XX To RGB printer From PIM PCB I-RGB
J1 Red
Pin 15
J2 Grn
P1
Video in
J3 Blu J4 Sync J5 Red J6 Grn Video out J7 Blu Pin 1
J8 Sync
See Table 11-15 Figure 11-20
Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N 3500-2644-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-15
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 251 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Color Printer Cable Assembly, External RGB (P/N 3500-2644-XX)
From PIM IRGB
To Coax Connectors
Function
P1-1 P1-9 P1-2 P1-10 P1-3 P1-11 P1-4 P1-12 P1-8 P1-13 P1-7 P1-14 P1-6 P1-15 P1-5 P1-15
J1 Center J1 Shield J2 Center J2 Shield J3 Center J3 Shield J4 Center J4 Shield J5 Center J5 Shield J6 Center J6 Shield J7 Center J7 Shield J8 Center J8 Shield
PIM_RED_EXTHRDCPY RED_OUT_RETURN PIM_GRN_EXTHRDCPY GRN_OUT_RETURN PIM_BLUE_EXTHRDCPY BLUE_OUT_RETURN PIM_CSYNC_EXTHRDCPY CSYNC_OUT_RETURN EXTHRDCPY_RED_PIM RED_IN_RETURN EXTHRDCPY_GRN_PIM GRN_IN_RETURN EXTHRDCPY_BLUE_PIM BLUE_OUT_RETURN EXTHRDCPY_CSYNC_PIM CSYNC_IN_RETURN
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 252 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2641-XX To Sony RGB printer From IIM PCB HARDCOPY
J1 Red
Pin 37
J2 Grn J3 Blu
Video in
J4 Sync P1
J5 Red J6 Grn J7 Blu
Video out
J8 Sync
Pin 1
J9 Printer control
See Table 11-16 Figure 11-21
Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX)
Table 11-16
Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX)
From IIM HARDCOPY
To Coax Connectors Function
P1-1 P1-20 P1-2 P1-21
J1 Center J1 Shield J2 Center J2 Shield
PIM_RED_INTHRDCPY RED_OUT_RETURN PIM_GRN_INTHRDCPY GRN_OUT_RETURN
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-16
Page 253 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Sony RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2641-XX)
From IIM HARDCOPY
To Coax Connectors Function
P1-3 P1-22
J3 Center J3 Shield
PIM_BLUE_INTHRDCPY BLUE_OUT_RETURN
P1-4 P1-23 P1-14 P1-25 P1-15 P1-26 P1-16 P1-27 P1-17 P1-28 P1-8 P1-12 P1-29 P1-30
J4 Center J4 Shield J5 Center J5 Shield J6 Center J6 Shield J7 Center J7 Shield J8 Center J8 Shield J9 Tip J9 Ring J9 Housing J9 Housing
PIM_CSYNC_INTHRDCPY CSYNC_OUT_RETURN INTHRDCPY_RED_PIM RED_IN_RETURN INTHRDCPY_GRN_PIM GRN_IN_RETURN INTHRDCPY_BLUE_PIM BLUE_OUT_RETURN INTHRDCPY_CSYNC_PIM CSYNC_IN_RETURN PIM_CNTRL_0_INTHRDCPY INTHRDCPY_STATUS_0_PIM GROUND SHIELD
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 254 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2643-XX To Mitsubishi RGB printer From IIM PCB HARDCOPY Pin 1
J1 Red J2 Grn
P1
Video in
J3 Blu J4 Sync J5 Red J6 Grn Video out J7 Blu Pin 37
J8 Sync J9 Hardcopy control (J9 is an 8-pin mini-DIN connector)
See Table 11-17 Figure 11-22
Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-17
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 255 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Mitsubishi RGB Printer Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2643-XX)
From IIM HARDCOPY P1-1 P1-20 P1-2 P1-21 P1-3 P1-22 P1-4 P1-23 P1-14 P1-25 P1-15 P1-26 P1-16 P1-27 P1-17 P1-28 P1-8 P1-9 P1-12 P1-29
To Coax Connectors J1 Center J1 Shield J2 Center J2 Shield J3 Center J3 Shield J4 Center J4 Shield J5 Center J5 Shield J6 Center J6 Shield J7 Center J7 Shield J8 Center J8 Shield J9-5 J9-2 J9-4 J9 Shield
Function PIM_RED_INTHRDCPY RED_OUT_RETURN PIM_GRN_INTHRDCPY GRN_OUT_RETURN PIM_BLUE_INTHRDCPY BLUE_OUT_RETURN PIM_CSYNC_INTHRDCPY CSYNC_OUT_RETURN INTHRDCPY_RED_PIM RED_IN_RETURN INTHRDCPY_GRN_PIM GRN_IN_RETURN INTHRDCPY_BLUE_PIM BLUE_OUT_RETURN INTHRDCPY_CSYNC_PIM CSYNC_IN_RETURN PIM_CNTRL0_HRDCPY PIM_CNTRL1_HRDCPY HRDCPY_STATUS0_PIM SHIELD
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 256 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-1835-XX P2
P1 See Table 11-18 Figure 11-23
DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX)
Table 11-18
DDEA Physio Jack Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1835-XX)
From P1
To P2
Function
P1-1 P1-2 P1-3
P2-4 P2-5 P2-1
Tip Shunt Tip Spring Sleeve
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 257 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2614-XX P2 Left speaker + Blk P3 Left speaker - Wht P4 +12 V Blk P5
P1
Lamp drive Wht P6 Right speaker + Blk P7 Right speaker - Wht
See Table 11-19 Figure 11-24
Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-19
Page 258 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Monitor Lower Bezel Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2614-XX)
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
Function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 -
1 -
1 -
1
1 -
1 -
+12 V (black) Left Speaker+ (black) Left Speaker- (white) Ground (not used) Right Speaker+ (black) Right Speaker- (white) Lamp Drive (white)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 259 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2632-XX
RED P1 WHITE PCB
See Table 11-20
Figure 11-25
Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX)
Table 11-20
Microphone Cable Assembly, External (P/N 3500-2632-XX)
From P1(Plug)
To PCB
Function
Ring Tip Shield
Red White No connection
Audio Audio Return Ground
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 260 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2633-XX
From IIM PCB MONITOR Pin 1
To monitor
P2
P1
Pin 25 Pin 37
Sliding latch
Pin 1
See Table 11-21 Figure 11-26
Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-21
Page 261 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Monitor Signal Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2633-XX)
From IIM (MONITOR)
To Monitor
Function
P2-1 P2-20 P2-2 P2-21 P2-14 P2-11 P2-30 P2-12 P2-33 P2-15 P2-17 P2-35 P2-18 P2-36 P2-19 P2-37
P1-10 P1-9 P1-22 P1-21 P1-11 P1-13 P1-12 P1-17 P1-4 P1-16 P1-3 P1-15 P1-2 P1-14 P1-1
GND L_SPKR GND R_SPKR AUDIO SHIELD MICR+ MICRMICR_SHIELD CSYNC_INTMON GND BLUE_INTMON BLUE_INTMON_REF GREEN_INTMON GREEN_INTMON_REF RED_INTMON RED_INTMON_REF
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 262 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
2275-0393-XX LED Panel lens
Panel connector
Panel
2-wire cable assembly (No pin-out table)
Header connector
Cable assembly is located in the monitor. The LED is positioned above the monitor controls and may be seen through holes in the monitor cover.
Figure 11-27
LED Cable Assembly (P/N 2275-0393-XX)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 263 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2639-XX
To ON/STANDBY switch
To UIM PCB ON/STANDBY
Rear connector (Black) P1 1 2 3 Center connector (Red)
Unconnected
See Table 11-22 Figure 11-28
On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX)
Table 11-22
On/Standby Switch Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2639-XX)
From UIM PCB
To ON/STANDBY Switch Spade Lugs
Function
P1-1 P1-2 P1-3
Spade Lug (Black wire) Spade Lug (Red wire) Drain - No Connection (Gnd)
GROUND IIM_P2-8 GROUND
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 264 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2741-XX
From P3 UIM PCB
To Command Module
Pin 9
Pin 9
P3
P2
Pin 1
Pin 1
See Table 11-23
Figure 11-29
Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-23
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 265 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Remote Control Port Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2741-XX)
From P3 UIM
To P2 Command Module
Function
P3-9 P3-8 P3-7 P3-6 P3-5 P3-4 P3-3 P3-2 P3-1
P2-9 P2-8 P2-7 P2-6 P2-5 P2-4 P2-3 P2-2 P2-1
+5 VOLT +5 VOLT GROUND GROUND GROUND (Not used) RMOTE_DATA_UIF PIM_CLOCK_UIF PIM_STROBE_UIF UIF_DATA_RMOTE
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 266 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2752-XX
Blk
Shield
PCB
P1 Red
See Table 11-24 Figure 11-30
Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2752-XX)
Table 11-24
Microphone Internal Monitor Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2752-XX)
From P1
To PCB
Function
P1-3 P1-2 P1-1
RED BLACK SHIELD
MIC+ MICSHIELD
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 267 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2770-XX To UIM PCB Pin 1
To lower user interface J1
P1
Pin 68
Front View (Both connector ends)
See Table 11-25
Figure 11-31
UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX)
Table 11-25
UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX)
From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-1 P1-2 P1-3 P1-4 P1-5
J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 J1-4 J1-5
L_SENSE_12 L_SENSE_11 L_SENSE_09 L_SENSE_04 L_SENSE_07
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-25
Page 268 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) (Continued)
From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-6 P1-7 P1-8 P1-9 P1-10 P1-11 P1-12 P1-13 P1-14 P1-15 P1-16 P1-17 P1-18 P1-19 P1-20 P1-21 P1-22 P1-23 P1-24 P1-25
J1-6 J1-7 J1-8 J1-9 J1-10 J1-11 J1-12 J1-13 J1-14 J1-15 J1-16 J1-17 J1-18 J1-19 J1-20 J1-21 J1-22 J1-23 J1-24 J1-25
L_SENSE_06 L_SENSE_00 L_SENSE_01 L_SENSE_03 TB_YA TB_XB TB_XA L_LED_1 L_SENSE_15 L_SCAN_5 L_SCAN_3 L_SCAN_0 L_SCAN_2 L_SCAN_6 L_SENSE_14 L_LED_2 DA_4 DA_5 DCS1n DCS2n
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-25
Page 269 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) (Continued)
From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-26 P1-27 P1-28 P1-29 P1-30 P1-31 P1-32 P1-33 P1-34 P1-35 P1-36 P1-37 P1-38 P1-39 P1-40 P1-41 P1-42 P1-43 P1-44 P1-45
J1-26 J1-27 J1-28 J1-29 J1-30 J1-31 J1-32 J1-33 J1-34 J1-35 J1-36 J1-37 J1-38 J1-39 J1-40 J1-41 J1-42 J1-43 J1-44 J1-45
DCS4n AND_CLK DD_1 DD_2 DD_4 DD_5 DA_0 DD_7 DA_1 L_SENSE_10 GROUND L_SENSE_08 GROUND L_SENSE_05 GROUND L_SENSE_02 GROUND TB_YB -12 VOLT L_LED_3
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-25
Page 270 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) (Continued)
From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-46 P1-47 P1-48 P1-49 P1-50 P1-51 P1-52 P1-53 P1-54 P1-55 P1-56 P1-57 P1-58 P1-59 P1-60 P1-61 P1-62 P1-63 P1-64 P1-65
J1-46 J1-47 J1-48 J1-49 J1-50 J1-51 J1-52 J1-53 J1-54 J1-55 J1-56 J1-57 J1-58 J1-59 J1-60 J1-61 J1-62 J1-63 J1-64 J1-65
-12 VOLT L_SENSE_13 L_SCAN_7 L_SCAN_1 +5 VOLT L_SCAN_4 +5 VOLT L_LED_8 +5 VOLT DA_3 +5 VOLT DCS0n +5 VOLT DCS3n +5 VOLT DD_0 GROUND DD_3 GROUND DD_6
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-25
Page 271 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
UIM to Lower User Interface Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2770-XX) (Continued)
From P1 UIM PCB
To J1 Lower UIF
Function
P1-66 P1-67 P1-68
J1-66 J1-67 J1-68
GROUND DA_2 GROUND
3500-2771-XX Pin 25 To IIM PCB CONTROL PANEL
To P2 UIM PCB
J1
P1
Pin 1 See Table 11-26 Figure 11-32
IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-26
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 272 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX)
To IIM PCB CONTROL PANEL
To P2 UIM PCB
Function
P1-1 P1-2 P1-3 P1-4 P1-5 P1-6 P1-7 P1-8 P1-9 P1-10 P1-11 P1-12 P1-13 P1-14 P1-15 P1-16 P1-17 P1-18 P1-19 P1-20
J1-1 J1-2 J1-3 J1-4 J1-5 J1-6 J1-7 J1-8 J1-9 J1-10 J1-11 J1-12 J1-13 J1-14 J1-15 J1-16 J1-17 J1-18 J1-19 J1-20
+5 VOLT +5 VOLT +5 VOLT +5 VOLT +12 VOLT -12 VOLT No Connection ON/STANDBY SWITCH-2 No Connection No Connection GROUND PIM_CLOCK_UIF PIM_DATA_UIF GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND SPEAKER LS1
4730-0036-02
Table 11-26
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 273 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
IIM to UIM Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2771-XX) (Continued)
To IIM PCB CONTROL PANEL
To P2 UIM PCB
Function
P1-21 P1-22
J1-21 J1-22
GROUND No Connection
P1-23 P1-24 P1-25
J1-23 J1-24 J1-25
No Connection PIM_STROBE_UIF UIF_DATA_PIM
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 274 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2772-XX From cable 3500-2633-XX
To ISEM Video In
(IIM MONITOR) P1-1
P1-2
Pin 37
Pin 25
Pin 1
Pin 1 To cable 3500-2633-XX (Monitor)
From ISEM Video Out P2-2
P2-1 Pin 37
Pin 37
Pin 1
Pin 1
See Table 11-27, Table 11-28, and Table 11-29 Figure 11-33
ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2772-XX)
4730-0036-02
Table 11-27
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 275 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P1-1 to P1-2 (P/N 3500-2772-XX)
From P1-1 IIM MONITOR
To P1-2 ISEM Video In
Function
14 1 15 2 16 3 17 4 21 22 9 10 4 11 13 12
14 1 15 2 16 3 17 4 21 22 9 10 4 11 13 12
RED_VIDEO RED_RETURN GREEN_VIDEO GREEN_RETURN BLUE_VIDEO BLUE_RETURN COMPOSITE_SYNC SYNC_RETURN RIGHT_SPEAKER+ RIGHT_SPEAKERLEFT_SPEAKER+ LEFT_SPEAKERGROUND UPHONE+ UPHONEUPHONE_SHIELD
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-28
Page 276 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly, P2-1 to P2-2 (P/N 3500-2772-XX)
From P2-1 Monitor
To P2-2 ISEM Video Out
Function
19 37 18 36 17 35 33 15 21 2 20 1 3 11 30 12
19 37 18 36 17 35 33 15 21 2 20 1 3 11 30 12
RED_VIDEO RED_RETURN GREEN_VIDEO GREEN_RETURN BLUE_VIDEO BLUE_RETURN COMPOSITE_SYNC SYNC_RETURN RIGHT_SPEAKER+ RIGHT_SPEAKERLEFT_SPEAKER+ LEFT_SPEAKERGROUND UPHONE+ UPHONEUPHONE_SHIELD
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-29
Page 277 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
ISEM Adapter Cable Assembly Jumper, P1-1 to P2-1 (P/N 3500-2772-XX)
From P1-1 Pin
To P2-1 Pin
Function
5 8 24 6 NO CONNECTION 19 18 20
7 6 5 4 25 CONNECT P2-1 PIN 6 8 27 9
+12 VOLT GROUND -12 VOLT +5 VOLT GROUND SCL SDA GROUND
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Power Cables
Page 278 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
System and OEM (internal and external) power cables are illustrated in Figure 11-34 through Figure 11-38. Pinout information for these cables are provided in Table 11-30 through Table 11-33.
3500-1482-XX
To hard disk drive Pin 1
P3 P1
From DDEA PCB 1
8
4
5
To optical disk drive Pin 1
P2
Table 11-30
Figure 11-34
Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-30
Page 279 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Disk Drive Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1482-XX)
From DDEA PCB
To Optical Drive
To Hard Drive
Function
P1-1 P1-2 P1-3 P1-4 P1-5 P1-6 P1-7 P1-8
P2-1 P2-4 P2-2 P2-3 -
P3-1 P3-4 P3-2 P3-3
+12 Vdc + 5 Vdc + 12 Vdc + 5 Vdc + 12 Vdc Return + 5 Vdc Return + 12 Vdc Return + 5 Vdc Return
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 280 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-1514-XX (+)Red (-)Blk 1 2 22 µf 50 V capacitor
24 V (+) Red
(+)Red (-)Blk
To ACIM P506
(+)Red (-)Blk
(+)Red (-)Blk
(-)Blk (Flat side)
Pin 1 (Red)
All Black and Red wire pairs go to individual fans.
Figure 11-35
Fan Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-1514-XX)
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 281 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-2616-XX To ACIM P505
Blue
Monitor power 115 VOLTS
Brown
3500-2616-XX
3 2 1
4 3 2 1
Grn/Yel Shield
See Table 11-31
Figure 11-36
Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX)
Table 11-31
Monitor Power Cable Assembly (P/N 3500-2616-XX)
From P505 on ACIM
To Monitor Power Connector
Function
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3
GND from ACIM (Green/Yellow) Neutral (Blue) Line Voltage (Brown) 115V
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 282 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
3500-1517-XX - AAM 1 3500-1873-XX - MIC or color printer 3500-2780-XX - VCR
To 3500-1578 ACIM: Hardcopy - P503 VCR - P504
4 3 2 1
Blue wire (neutral) To AAM, MIC, color printer, or VCR 3
1
115 Volts 3
2 (OEM)
2 1
Brown wire (line) Green wire (ground) Shield wire
1
Figure 11-37
Power cables are not interchangeable. Lengths will vary.
See Table 11-32
OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-32
Page 283 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
OEM Power Cable Assembly, 115 Vac, Internal
From P503/P504 on ACIM
To OEM Power Connectors
Function
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3
GND from ACIM (Green/Yellow) Neutral (Blue) Line Voltage (Brown) 115 V
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
3500-1547-XX - Hardcopy 3500-2397-XX - MIC 3500-2781-XX - VCR
Page 284 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
1
To 3500-1579/1580 ACIM: Hardcopy - P503 VCR - P504 4 3 2 1
Blue wire (neutral) To VCR, MIC, or hardcopy 1
4 2
230 Volts 4
2 (OEM)
1
Brown wire (line) Green wire (ground) Shield wire
1
Figure 11-38
Power cables are not interchangeable. Lengths will vary.
See Table 11-33
OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Table 11-33
Page 285 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
OEM Power Cable Assembly, 230 Vac, Internal
From P503/P504 on ACIM
To OEM Power Connectors
Function
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 4
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 4
GND from ACIM (Green/Yellow) Neutral (Blue) Line Voltage (Brown) 230V
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 286 Cabling: System Cabling and Connectors
Monitor Internal Cabling
Monitor internal cabling is illustrated in Figure 11-39.
System Interconnect Cabling
Notes for the system interconnect cabling diagrams are provided in Figure 11-40. System signal interconnect and power distribution cabling are illustrated in Figure 11-41 and Figure 11-42. Signal Interconnect cables are listed in Table 11-34 and power cables are listed in Table 11-35.
NOTE
Some of the cables within the video monitor assembly are field replaceable, and some are not. Cables within the OEM monitor assembly (P/N 2100-1346-XX) are not field replaceable. If one of the cables in the OEM monitor assembly is bad, order the video monitor assembly (P/N 3500-2532-XX). Refer to Figure 11-39 to determine which cables are included with the OEM monitor assembly.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 287 Cabling: Cable Part Numbers
Cable Part Numbers Table 11-34
Part Number
HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables Part Description (See Figure 11-41 for the System Cabling and for peripheral part numbers)
2275-0327-01 2275-0394-01 2275-0395-01 2275-0396-01 3500-1540-04 3500-2741-01
Cable Assy, AAM Input, Internal Cable Assy, AAM Input, Ext, Level 10 Cable Assy, AAM-Out, Int, Level 10 Cable Assy, AAM-Out, Ext, Level 10 Cable Assy, B&W Video Printer Cable Assy, Command Module Cover to P3 Remote Control UIM
2275-0335-01 3500-1541-04 3500-2644-01 3500-1835-01
Cable Assy, Codonics Printer, NP1660 Cable Assy, Color Video Printer, Internal Cable Assy, Color Video Printer, External RGB Cable Assy, DDEA, Physio, Jack,
3500-1483-03
Cable Assy, Disk Drive Signal, DDEA
3500-1851-01
Cable Assy, Disk Drive, Signal, No MO
Notes/Reference See Figure 11-10 See Figure 11-12 See Figure 11-11 See Figure 11-13 See Figure 11-18 See Figure 11-29, and Figure 14-33 and Figure 14-37 See Figure 11-8 See Figure 11-19 See Figure 11-20 See Figure 11-23, and Figure 14-16 and Figure 14-17 See Figure 11-16 and Figure 14-19 See Figure 14-20
4730-0036-02
Table 11-34
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 288 Cabling: Cable Part Numbers
HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables (Continued)
Part Number
Part Description (See Figure 11-41 for the System Cabling and for peripheral part numbers)
4500-5512-01 2275-0326-01 3500-2642-01 3500-2771-01
Cable Assy, External Disk Drive Test Cable Assy, External OEM Cable Assy, External SVHS VCR Cable Assy, IIM to P2 UIM
3500-2772-01 3500-2770-01
Cable Assy, ISEM Adapter Cable Assy, J1 LCP to P1 UIM
2275-0393-01
Cable Assy, LED, 3 mm Conn, 8-inch L
3500-2632-02 3500-2752-01
Cable Assy, Microphone Cable Assy, Microphone, Internal, Monitor
3500-2643-01 3500-2614-02
Cable Assy, Mitsubishi RGB, Video Printer Cable Assy, Monitor, Lower Bezel
Notes/Reference
See Figure 11-15 See Figure 11-32, and Figure 14-33 See Figure 11-33 See Figure 11-31, and Figure 14-33 See Figure 11-27, and Figure 11-39, and Figure 14-26 See Figure 14-28 See Figure 11-30, and Figure 11-25, and Figure 11-39, and Figure 14-26 See Figure 11-22 See Figure 11-24, and Figure 11-39, and Figure 14-26, and Figure 14-27
4730-0036-02
Table 11-34
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 289 Cabling: Cable Part Numbers
HDI 3500 Signal Interconnect Cables (Continued)
Part Number
Part Description (See Figure 11-41 for the System Cabling and for peripheral part numbers)
3500-2613-01 3500-2633-02
Cable Assy, Monitor, Upper Bezel Cable Assy, Monitor to System , 64-inch
3500-1539-03 3500-2639-01
Cable Assy, Multi-Image Camera (MIC), Aspect Cable Assy, On/Standby Switch
2275-0326-01 2275-0337-01 3500-2641-02 3500-1404-06 2275-0176 2275-0267-01
Cable Assy, OEM, NI-RGB External Cable Assy, Serial Data Cable Assy, Sony RGB, Video Printer Cable Assy, VCR, Internal Cable, BNC, M/M, GFT, RG 59B/U, 750HM Cable, RCA-RCA, Stereo, Molded, GFT
Notes/Reference See Figure 14-26 See Figure 11-26, and Figure 11-39 See Figure 11-17 See Figure 11-28, and Figure 14-33 and Figure 14-34 See Figure 11-7 See Figure 11-9 See Figure 11-21 See Figure 11-14 Not Illustrated See Figure 11-6
4730-0036-02
Table 11-35
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 290 Cabling: Cable Part Numbers
HDI 3500 Power Distribution Cables
Part Number
Part Description (See Figure 11-42 for power distribution diagram and for OEM/peripheral part numbers)
3500-1873-02 3500-2397-03 3500-1482-03
Cable Assy, 100-120 VAC, Dual Hardcopy Cable Assy, 230 VAC, Dual Hardcopy Cable Assy, Disk Drive Power, DDEA
3500-1514-03
Cable Assy, Fan, 24 VDC
3500-1517-05 3500-1516-05 3500-2780-01 3500-1547-05 3500-2781-01 3500-2616-01 2275-0373-01 3500-0386-01
Cable Assy, Power, 115 V, Hardcopy Cable Assy, Power, 115 V, VCR Cable Assy, Power, 115 V, VCR, HDI 5000 Cable Assy, Power, 230 V, Hardcopy Cable Assy, Power, 230 V, VCR, HDI 5000 Cable Assy, Power Monitor, Electrohome Cord, PC Adapter, 10A/125 V, 12-inch Power Cord Assy, 96-inch, 16-Guage
Notes/Reference See Figure 11-37 See Figure 11-38 See Figure 11-34, and Figure 14-15 and Figure 14-16 and Figure 14-20 See Figure 11-35, and Figure 14-11 See Figure 11-37 See Figure 11-37 See Figure 11-37 See Figure 11-38 See Figure 11-38 See Figure 11-25 Not Illustrated Not Illustrated
4730-0036-02
Table 11-35
Part Number 2275-0324-01 2275-0388-01 2265-0056-02 2275-0391-01
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 291 Cabling: Cable Part Numbers
HDI 3500 Power Distribution Cables (Continued) Part Description (See Figure 11-42 for power distribution diagram and for OEM/peripheral part numbers)
Notes/Reference
Power Cord, Harmonized, CEE-22 & 7
See Figure 14-21
Power Cord, Unshld, Hosp Plug
See Figure 14-21
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 292 Cabling: System Cable Diagrams
HOT
Line AC power
OEM monitor 2100-1346-XX
HOT
Microphone assembly
P1
NEUTRAL
INT_MIC+
3 2
NEUTRAL GROUND
MIC INT_MIC-
GROUND
3500-2631-02
1
3500-2752-01
14 1 15
UIF_LIGHT_CONTROL RED_SHIELD LED_DRIVE SWITCH_SENSE_UP
2
3
From system signal connector Cable P/N 3500-2633-02
17 4 19 18 21 22 9 10
SWITCH_SENSE_DOWN
BLUE_IN
+5 V
SYNC_IN
5 24 20 8
4 3
5
GND SYNC_SHIELD
LED+
10
BLUE_SHIELD
2
GND
1
SLC
LED 2
LED_DRIVE
Monitor control panel PCB assembly
2275-0393-01 P3
7500-1312-XX 5 6
RIGHT_SPEAKER+
1
RIGHT_SPEAKER-
2
LEFT_SPEAKER+
1
LEFT_SPEAKER-
2
+ -
Right speaker
+ -
Left speaker
SDA P2 RIGHT_SPEAKER+
9
RIGHT_SPEAKER-
2 3
10
LEFT_SPEAKER+
6
LEFT_SPEAKER-
7 MIC+ MIC-
11 13 12
1 9
GREEN_IN GREEN_SHIELD
16
P4
P5
RED_IN
MIC_SHIELD
MIC_SHIELD
+12 V
Light bar PCB assembly
14 15
Bulb 3900-0032-01 (8 plcs)
13 4
-12 V
3
GND
2
GND
1
1 7
-12 V LAMP_DRV 7500-1313-XX (PCB)
3500-2614-02
Note: There are no field-replaceable parts within the OEM monitor assembly. MONDIAGRAM 10/16/00
Figure 11-39 Monitor Internal Cabling Diagram
Page 293 Cabling: System Cable Diagrams
1
4730-0036-02
2275-0327-XX and 2275-0394-XX = Internal installation 2275-0395-XX and 2275-0396-XX = External installation
2
Do not connect external printer to printer connector on PIM PCB.
3
Part number 4500-5512-01 is an external disk drive test cable.
4
HDI 3500 Service Manual
To obtain video loop-through when the ISEM is installed, video is routed from the monitor connector on the IIM PCB to the ISEM Video In and out the ISEM Video Out connector to the monitor. (Two 3500-2633-XX cables are required.)
5
When the ISEM is not installed, only one 3500-2633-XX is required.
6
Mitsubishi printer only.
7
Connect this end to P503 or P504 for UP5600 printer installation.
8
If a UP5600 is installed, disconnect the main transformer connector to P501 on the ACIM. Connect the UP5600 as shown.
9
ON/STANDBY switch controls system logic voltage to turn untrasound system ON & OFF.
Figure 11-40 Notes for HDI 3500 Signal/Power Interconnect Diagram
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 294 Cabling: System Cable Diagrams
3500-2771-01
Microphone
3500-2632-02
3500-2639-01
3500-2752-01
P1
2275-0326-01
On/Standby switch J1
P2
Internal cable
3500-2741-01
3500-2614-02
P3 User Interface Module
4
P1
4
3500-2770-01
System monitor
Speakers
Remote control port
External monitor
3500-2633-02 3500-2633-02
5
Centerplane PCB PIM/A2B
DDEA/A1F
IIM/A1B
J1
3500-2644-01
Ext. serial printer
3500-1483-03
NI-RGB
Lower User Interface
Monitor
I-RGB
3500-2642-01
P4
S-VID
VCR
Video switch
CVID out
3500-2772-01
Keyboard
Hand controller
Keyboard
SYNC IN
SYNC OUT
RED IN
RED OUT
GRN IN
GRN OUT
BLUE IN
Pulse
B&W VID
2
Ext. printer
Footswitch
SCIP E-Net
4500-5512-01
External
3500-2644-01
6
BLUE OUT
3500-1540-04 3500-2643-01
2 Printer
External
3500-1404-06
Hardcopy device
3500-1540-04
2275-0327-01 2275-0394-01 (Ext. install)
3500-2642-01
B/W video printer
2275-0267-01 3500-2641-02
Footswitch
External SVHS VCR Video out
Access Acquisition Module
Panasonic VCR MD830
2275-0267-01
3500-2644-01 (Int. install)
AAM control panel
E-Net
Hardcopy
Hard drive
3500-2641-02
Video in
Ext. VCR audio in
Phono
2275-0176
1
10101 serial
CVID in
Video Video in out
ISEM
Ext. VCR audio out
ECG
3
Trackball
CPU/A6B
ADAPTR/A9B
Control Panel
Optical drive
Trackball
3500-2633-02
1
3500-1539-03
References to the flag notes are on Figure 11-40
2275-0395-01 2275-0396-01 Multi-image camera
Mitsubishi Color Printer
Figure 11-41 HDI 3500 System Signal Interconnect Diagram
5000SIGDIAG 10/13/00
Page 295 Cabling: System Cable Diagrams
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
3500-2639-01 System monitor
On/Standby switch J1
P1
AC in P3
User Interface Module
Fans
3500-1514-03
9
3500-2616-01
P2
Centerplane PCB ACIM/PS4 DDEA/A1F
+24 VDC P506
Optical drive
3500-1482-03 Lower User Interface
3500-2780-01, 120V 3500-2781-01, 240V
P505 P507 P504 P503
ECG
P508
7
P502
Pulse Phono
ISEM
P501
Footswitch
8
Hard drive
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz 3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz 3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz 3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
Access Acquisition Module
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz 3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
3500-1517-05, 120V 6
3500-1547-05 240V, CP50E
3500-1873-02, 120V 60Hz 3500-2397-03, 240V 50Hz
Mitsubishi Color Printer
3500-1873-02 120V 60Hz 3500-2397-03 240V 50Hz Main transformer
OEM transformer
Sony Color Printer UP5600
Panasonic VCR MD830
Cables are part of transformer 26010052XX
Cables are part of transformer 26010058XX
References to the flag notes are on Figure 11-40
Multi-image camera B/W video printer
Hardcopy device
Figure 11-42 HDI 3500 System Power Interconnect Diagram
5000PWRDIAG 3/30/98
4730-0036-02
12
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 296 Change History: 150.XX Software Releases
Change History This section lists the software and hardware changes associated with a specific software release number. Unless noted under the Hardware Changes paragraph, the hardware changes are not required for that particular software release. The part numbers listed after the software versions are the optical disk part numbers for that software version.
150.XX Software Releases Features Supported
Broadband Linear Array Scanheads •
L7-4 40 mm
•
LAP L9-5 (laparoscopic)
•
L10-5 38 mm
•
CL10-5 (compact linear)
•
L12-5 38 mm
•
L12-5 50 mm
Broadband Curved Array •
C3.5 76 mm
•
C4-2 40 mm
•
C5-2 40R
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
•
C5 IVT 11 mm (intravaginal)
•
C7-4 40 mm
•
C9-5 ICT 8 mm (intracavity)
•
C8-4v
•
CT8-4
•
C8-5 14R
Page 297 Change History: 150.XX Software Releases
Broadband Phased Array •
P3-2 20 mm
•
P4-2 20 mm
•
P5-3
•
P7-4
•
MPT 7-4 (multi-plane transesophageal)
•
BPT 9-5 (biplane transesophageal)
Doppler Transducers •
TCD Static D2 TC
•
D2 CW
•
D5 CW
•
D10 CW
Miscellaneous Features •
3D Grayscale
•
Tissue Harmonic Imaging
4730-0036-02
Features Not Supported
150.23 (8.5.1 build level)
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 298 Change History: 150.XX Software Releases
•
High Q Cardiac Output/Volume Flow
•
DiskLink/NetLink short loops
•
VCR controls on the control panel
•
Tissue Doppler Imaging (TDI)
•
Modality Worklist
•
Sono CT
•
Intelligent Frame Rate Accelerator
•
DVS
•
The following UpLink functions -
Some low-level diagnostic tests are not implemented
-
Image transfer capability is intermittent
-
PCM flash reload is not functional
Initial release 4252-0831-06 on July 2, 1999.
New Features Refer to Features Supported in software version 150.XX.
Problems Corrected Not applicable.
Known Problems Refer to Operating Notes: 4707-0036-02
English
4777-0036-02
German
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 299 Change History: 150.XX Software Releases
4787-0036-02
French
4797-0036-02
Spanish
4807-0036-02
Dutch
4817-0036-02
Swedish
4827-0036-02
Italian
4837-0036-02
Finnish
4847-0036-02
Brazilian
4877-0036-02
Portuguese
4887-0036-02
Danish
4907-0036-02
Greek
Hardware Changes There are no hardware changes.
150.24 (8.5.2 build level)
Released 4252-0831-07 on February 18, 2000.
New Features None.
Problems Corrected Software version 150.24 deletes obsolete UART tests from the FEC and ADAPTR PCB, tests in the Machine Comprehensive Test. New versions of the FEC PCB (P/N 7500-1526-XX) and ADAPTR PCB (P/N 7500-1328-XX) do not have the obsolete UART, which caused failure of the Comprehensive Test.
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 300 Change History: 150.XX Software Releases
Known Problems Refer to Operating Notes: 4707-0036-03
English
4777-0036-03
German
4787-0036-03
French
4797-0036-03
Spanish
4807-0036-03
Dutch
4817-0036-03
Swedish
4827-0036-03
Italian
4837-0036-03
Finnish
4847-0036-03
Brazilian
4877-0036-03
Portuguese
4887-0036-03
Danish
4907-0036-03
Greek
Hardware Changes There are no hardware changes required for this software version, however, the FEC and ADAPTR were changed to delete obsolete UART tests. Software revision 150.24 supports those changes. See “Problems Corrected” on page 298.
151.06 (8.5.3 build level)
Released SW P/N 4252-0886-06 on June 07, 2000. Field upgrade SW P/N 4252-0896-05
4730-0036-02
HDI 3500 Service Manual
Page 301 Change History: 150.XX Software Releases
New Features All features of the previous software version (150.24 software). There are no new features released with this software version.
Problems Corrected •
Corrects an intermittent problem that prevents the Doppler spectral trace from updating when the sample volume cursor is moved.
•
Improves system response to the Freeze control. Also improves system response times due to TGC slidepot or other control activation during periods of high PCM activity.
•
Corrects an issue with the OB graph causing current measurement values to not be displayed in the year 2000.
•
Adds a low-level optical disk format option to the user diagnostics menu. Performing a low-level optical disk format enables faster disk operation.
•
Allows the user to perform a CW exam using the D2CW probe when the BPT9-5 scanhead is connected. Previously, there was no Doppler signal when this was attempted.
•
Prevents the system from hanging after deleting all images from the hard disk if one of the images is not readable. Unreadable images may result from turning off the system before the image has been fully saved to disk, a hard disk error, or a power supply problem.
•
Corrects a DiskLink issue with the patient exam directory showing patient exams as being sent to the optical disk when they are not.